Home

KM3050-4050-5050 service manual

1.
2. Light path Paper path Figure 1 1 3 Machine cross section Paper feed section Main charging section Optical section Developing section Transfer and separation section Cleaning and charge erasing section Fuser section Eject and switchback section Duplex section 900 NO3 aT COD 1 2 1 gt 2GN 2GP 2GR Installation environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 RH Power supply 120 V AC 11 5A 220 to 240 VAC 6 3 A Power source frequency 50 Hz 0 3 60 Hz 0 3 Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity abrupt ambient temperature changes and hot or cold air directed onto the machine Avoid dust and vibration Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowanc
3. t ES Z 2 2 a 5 ws 8 m a 250 gt Ww m 566 mie ii L e GAver iz a x Ww ANNOO L Ww GND Eje a 2 oe ram O a Sm DIS 138 ste 1 5 Q bss ey Feta 2 aa 386 z DIS 13s Tt o FE oE aM anvet sts gt xxo 1NNO9 y ele alera ae ENO or for eiafera S 13S zalia srafora x oO stajsia Te gt rralrre u zt gis Tht cralere O 4 ala roy H zia era 3 ai SSOUOZ H nalia 2 O EE lt ASt rie oafora z LE AVEF Le is ee zlez uomaa 6a 6a i zit z i NO SHI 29 8 PENJO rte ais 8a 68 and IIi za a 99 98 sa sa va ra LAS Tee T ea a ACE aa EE 8 a za ea AS o 1g 19 vie gt ant tit tLe tie Gt ol f UAZ mS 1 A ANOS B AE TNO 2a sively ssf z 1 MS1d GNDS Oo z Eye NS efe Ziv ziv ete S 5 Gt JE MECK GNOS TT g Ta swat ans aNndd sts il TAE Sis SWW SIV ims ran ONOd 219 ae a 9 PIV b e s raw 7 OND SNS efe aaret saer ZMS ANT we reog cess atv fer 1 Ave 1 sas Liv T 1 AWE L GUZ oivjoiv je HOAre 1 SrO ev ey MSzO1 1 JVF GND 1 Sai av ov 1 QZ Tate GAS 1 OTe
4. Lower duplex feed roller BFS Copying onto reverse side Switchback operation Copying onto front side normal rotation of eject motor reverse rotation of eject motor normal rotation of eject motor Paper path Figure 2 1 27 2 1 18 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout 1 PWBs Machine front VA Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2 2 1 PWBs 1 Engine PWB EPWB eeeen Controls the other PWBs electrical components and optional devices 2 Main PWB MPWB seee Controls the image processing and operation panel 3 Power source PWB PSPWB Generates 24 V DC 5 V DC and 3 3 V DC controls the fuser heater 4 High voltage PWB HVTPWB Main charging Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer 5 Scanner PWB SPWB Controls the scanning section 6 Inverter PWB INPWB Controls the exposure lamp 7 SHD PWB SHDPWB Controls the shading correction and AGC of CCD 8 CC
5. oOo TAN Figure 2 1 17 Transfer and separation sections Separation electrode SC o gt Transfer roller HVTPWB Figure 2 1 18 Transfer and separation sections block diagram 2 1 13 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Also the toner quantity in the waste toner box is sensed with the overflow sensor OFS Cleaning spiral Cleaning lamp CL Cleaning roller Drum Figure 2 1 19 Cleaning and charge erasing sections Figure 2 1 20 Cleaning and charge erasing sections block diagram 2 1 14 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 7 Fuser section The fuser section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2 1 21 When paper reaches the fuser section after the transfer process it passes between the press roller and heat roller which is heated by fuser heaters M or S FH M or FH S Pres sure is applied by the fuser unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted fused and fixed onto the paper The heat roller is heated by fuser heaters M or S FH M or FH S inside it its surface tempe
6. 2070 ms 40 50 ppm 87 Jam in eject section of internal tray 2 3000 sheet document fin Internal tray entry sensor 2 ITPES2 does not turn on within specified time of internal tray entry sensor 1 ITPES1 turning on 1708 ms 30 ppm 1322 ms 40 50 ppm Internal tray entry sensor 2 ITPES2 does not turn off 676 ms isher only nts feat within specified time of internal tray entry sensor 1 ITPES1 turning off 88 Eject switch 1 ESW1 is not turned on within specified 1324 ms Jam in eject section of time allay S000 snee Side registration home position sensor 1 SRHPS1 is not 500 ms document finisher only ae naan turned off within specified time of its turning on Side registration home position sensor 2 SGRHPS2 is not 500 ms turned off within specified time of its turning on The paper conveying belt detection sensor PCBDS is 2000 ms not turned off within specified time 1 4 8 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional 89 The centerfold paper entry sensor CPES does not turn 1770 ms 30 ppm finisher Jam in centerfold unit off within specified time of centerfold paper detection sen 1370 ms 40 50 ppm 3000 sheet document finisher only sor CPDS turning on The centerfold paper entry sensor CPES does not turn on within specified time of centerfold paper detection sen sor CPDS turning on 1770 ms
7. cec ccceseseeceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseasesenenesesenenenseeeeseneeeeenes 1 2 11 1 3 Maintenance Mode 13 1 Maintenance Mode isis alice Sieben etal ellen A al eed deal aaa lana 1 3 1 1 Executing a maintenance item ceeceeesecceeseceeseeeeeeeneneeseaeeeseeaeneneeseseeeesseaensnensseseeeseneeaeeesaersanes 1 3 1 2 Maintenance modes item liSt eeccceeceeesecceeseceeeeeeceeesecesesneeeesgeeneeeseseeneeecenseessensseseeenedeeeeeseneeenenes 1 3 2 3 Contents of the maintenance mode itEMS eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeetaeeseaeeseeeseaeesieeseaeenaeeteas 1 3 6 1 4 Troubleshooting 124 1 Paper misieed detection ij ste de cthincteainiin een Act renee ai ne nee are et 1 4 1 1 Paper misteed indication i ai e aeae a eaaa Ea E oaa aa Ra r Aa dbenessesetauct agate aea da Aaina 1 4 1 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ceecceseseeeeeeceeeeccetesceeeeneneneneneeseneeeeeseseesnaneesesesenseenensneeeesenes 1 4 2 3 Paper misteedSs niiin a e De abies feist ee ae Se 1 4 11 422 Seli claQnOSiS me s corel isc iecias Gace tea Redes het aceasta cated Ea EERE SRN 1 4 22 1 Self diagnostic function vice ccuiiecacad iin aia ee ete aetna 1 4 22 2 Selfdiagnostic COdeS 14 t cc cceeecvaes ecvetenscteasts thes Gee e pt actos cued eh neesteenastins Hanestectnieeadeeaeee 1 4 23 1 4 3 Image formation problems cee ccceecceeeseneceseeeeeeeeceeeeecesesceneesenenesaneeseee
8. 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm The tray eject sensor TEJS does not turn on within specified time of mail paper entry switch MPESW turn ing on Tray 1 to 4 2618 ms 30 ppm 2026 ms 40 50 ppm Tray 5 to 7 1483 ms 30 ppm 1148 ms 40 50 ppm The tray eject sensor TEJS is not turned off within spec ified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 91 Finisher cover open 3000 sheet document finisher The front cover top cover or right sub tray is opened when starting the finisher operation The centerfold unit top cover is opened when starting the centerfold operation The mail box cover is opened when starting the opera tion Document finisher The finisher cover becomes open during paper is run ning Paper is remaining in paths at power on 92 Exit sensor non arrival jam document finisher only In the straight mode the exit sensor EXS is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sensor PES was turned on 1770 ms 1 4 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional 93 The reverse sensor REVS does not turn on within spec 1071 ms finisher Reverse sensor jam ified time of paper entry sensor PES turning on noe finisher The reverse sensor REVS is not turned on within speci 435 ms y fied time The reverse sensor REVS does not turn off within spec 6
9. 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 74 Setting the enterprise mode Description Sets whether or not the enterprise mode setting is enabled Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Enterprise mode setting is enabled OFF Enterprise mode setting is disabled Initial setting ON Inch specifications OFF Metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U901 Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts Method Press the start key The counts by paper feed locations are displayed Display Paper feed locations MP TRAY MP tray CASSETTE 1 Cassette 1 CASSETTE 2 Cassette 2 CASSETTE 3 Optional cassette 3 CASSETTE 4 Optional cassette 4 LCF Optional 3000 sheet paper feeder DUPLEX Duplex section When an optional paper feed device is not installed the corresponding count is
10. e m 3 3 1 Feedshift guide 2 Eject roller 3 Eject pulley 4 Switchback roller 5 Switchback pulley 6 7 8 N Eject switch ESW Feedshift switch FSSW Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Hf Pla Figure 2 1 23 Eject and switchback sections FSSW FSSOL Q N qT vt oO gt YC14 B11 YC14 B14 YC14 A11 lt vt oO gt m pe wo Figure 2 1 24 Eject and switchback sections block diagram 2 1 16 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 9 Duplex section The duplex section consists of the components shown in figure In duplex mode after copying on to the reverse face of the paper the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex section The paper is then conveyed to the paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers Panes Feedshift guide Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley Duplex feed pulley Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW SGESRS Figu
11. Dirty or flawed drum 16 Fusing is poor Copy example Causes Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Check procedures corrective measures if Wrong types of paper Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Flawed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 30 Flawed fuser heater 17 Image is out of focus Copy example Causes Replace the fuser heater see page 1 5 31 Check procedures corrective measures 4 Defective image scanning unit Replace the image scanning unit see page 1 5 18 Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation 1 4 49 2GN 2GP 2GR 18 Image center does not align with the original center Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted image center line Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of image printing see page 1 3 19 Misadjusted scanner center line Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration see page 1 3 25 Original is not placed correctly Place the original correctly 19 Image is not square Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Laser scanner unit positioned incor Adjust the installation posi
12. Figure 2 1 7 Optical section Mirror 1 frame Mirror 2 frame Exposure lamp EL Mirror 1 Mirror 2 Mirror 3 Lens CCD PWB CCDPWB Image scanning unit 0 Laser scanner unit LSU 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 Original scanning The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp EL and scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB in the image scan ning unit via the three mirrors the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner When the DP is used the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DP original scanning position to start scanning Original Image data SHDPWB communication Image data Figure 2 1 8 Optional section block diagram 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Image printing The image data scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB is processed on the main PWB MPWB and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit LSU By repeatedly turning the laser on and off the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surface Figure 2 1 9 Laser scanner unit 1 1 Laser diode PWB LDPWB 2 Collimator lens 3 Cylindrical lens 4 Polygon motor PM 5 Polygon mirror 6 fO lens 7 Mirror 8 Mirror 9 BD sensor mirror 10 Cylindrical correcting lens 11 BD senso
13. Printer left margin right margin 2 0 7 2mm 2 047 8mm Printer trailing edge margin 3 042 5mm Figure 1 3 24 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U403 U404 P 1 3 66 P 1 3 67 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 65 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U403_ Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen 1 3 66 Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step A MARGIN Scanner left margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5mm B MARGIN Scanner leading edge margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5mm C MARGIN Scanner right margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5mm D MARGIN Scanner trailing edge margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5mm Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Ooh wo Scanner leading edge margin 3 1 5mm Ejection direction ref
14. When the centerfold position too far right sample 1 increase the preset value When the centerfold position too far left sample 2 decrease the setting value Reference value within 3 mm 3mm l gt N Center line Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 23 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 57 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U246 Setting the side registration cursor stop position 1 Select the desired cursor position 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting FRONT Front side registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 REAR Rear side registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 END Trailing edge registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the paper feed device Description Turns on motors and clutches of optional 3000 sheet paper feeder or paper feeder Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device Method 1 Press the start key The value varies depending to the option furnished 3000 sheet paper feeder Display Motor and clutches LCF FEED Paper feeder conveying motor PFCM
15. Checking the operation panel keys Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Inch specifications Letter 2 Metric specifications A4 2 Setting the trial functions Setting punch destination Inch specifications INCH Metric specifications EUROPE METRIC Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built in finisher OFF Setting finisher stack quantity 0 0 1 2 Checking the operation of the finisher Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting Operation panel and support equipment Checking the operation of the DP motors Checking the DP switches Checking messages Setting the finisher 3000 sheet document finisher Centerfold unit built in finisher 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Setting the paper feed device Mode setting Setting the maintenance cycle 400000 30 ppm 500000 40 50 ppm t 2 Checking clearing the maintenance count Setting the destination Switching between double and single counts Double count Selecting the timing for copy counting After ejection t2 Setting OEM purchaser code 07 Setting service status page ON Setting the black line
16. Display Description Setting Initial range setting PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U099 Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor mal functions frequently due to incident light or the like Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission data B W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Method to display the data for the sensor 1 Place the original and close the original cover or DP The detection sensor transmissi
17. Setting Density in text and photo mode 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting MIXED DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 MIXED LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller Image density Setting 3 Setting 0 Set to LIGHTER Set to DARKER Density adjustment Light Center Dark Figure 1 3 17 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting Density in text mode 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 35 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U093 1 3 36 Setting Density in photo mode 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys
18. 4 NoD Remove the developing unit see page 1 5 26 Release the inserted part and remove the connector cover Remove the connector While pushing the hole with a sharp pointed object remove the main charger unit Release the inserted part and remove the cleaning motor unit from the main charger unit Replace the main charger unit Refit the cleaning motor unit to the main charger unit Install the main charger unit 2GN 2GP 2GR r A T Inserted part nn Connector Figure 1 5 51 Main charger unit Figure 1 5 52 Main charger unit Inserted part Figure 1 5 53 1 5 25 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 5 Developing section 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit procedure Developing release lever 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the toner container and waste toner mA box lt gt 3 Remove the pin and turn the developing release lever in the direction of the arrow Y hee Remove the developing unit Replace the developing unit and install the unit 6 Perform maintenance mode U157 and U158 to clear the counter value see page 1 3 42 42 of Developing unit Figure 1 5 55 1 5 26 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 6 Transfer section 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller unit Procedure 1 Open the left co
19. Defective paper entry sen sor With 5 V DC present at CN14 1and CN14 3 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 2 and CN14 4 on the main PCB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper entry sensor stay jam Check if the paper entry Check and remedy Jam code 94 guide is deformed Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation PWB 45 Defective paper conveying With 5 V DC present at CN4 4 on the finisher main PWB check if A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper conveying sensor jam Jam code 95 sensor CN4 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying sensor Check if the paper convey ing motor malfunctions Check Check if the paper convey ing roller and paper convey ing pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the paper convey ing guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 46 A paper jam in optional built in fin isher is indicated dur ing copying jam between finisher and machine Jam code 96 Defective intermediate tray sensor With 5 V DC present at YC3 1 on the finisher control PWB check if YC3 2 on the finisher contr
20. Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4 Letter size and to display the result in user simulation Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select CALCULATION RATE 3 Change the setting using the keys Description Setting range Initial setting Size parameter 0 1 to 3 0 1 0 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the paper feed location for the printer Two or more cassette can be selected 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 63 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U342 Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or ca
21. Outline font 80 fonts PCL6 136 fonts KPDL3 Bitmap font 1 font 79 fonts are processed by outline font OCR characters OCR A OCR B and OCR kana Plug amp Play SNMP printer MIB supported 10BASE T 100BASE TX TCP IP PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP E mail transmission SMTP Scan to E mail TWAIN scan TWAIN source 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x 100 dpi 200 x 400 dpi Monochrome TIFF MMR PDF MMR Gray JPEG PDF JPEG Color JPEG PDF high compression 1 sided monochrome 50 sheets min Color 25 sheets min 2 sided monochrome 25 sheets min Color 12 5 sheets min NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 1 2 Parts names 1 Machine 1 Original cover Option 2 Original size indicator plates 3 Clip holder 4 Reception indicator 5 Error indicator 6 Left cover 1 7 Left cover 1 Lever 8 Left cover 2 9 Platen 10 Operation panel 11 Cassette 1 12 Cassette 2 Figure 1 1 1 Toner container Toner container stopper Waste toner box Front cover Paper width adjusting tab Length adjustment plate Top tray Main power switch Paper width guides Multi purpose tray Memory card cover holder Handles USB memory slot A2 USB memory slot A3 Memory card slot Network interface connector USB interface co
22. Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 15 The message requesting cover to be closed is dis played when the front cover or left cover 1 2 is closed 1 Poor contact in the con nector terminals of front cover switch left cover 1 switch or left cover 2 switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable 2 Defective front cover switch left cover 1 switch or left cover 2 switch Check for continuity across each switch If there is no continuity when the switch is on replace it 16 Others 1 4 54 1 Wiring is broken shorted or makes poor contact Check for continuity If none repair 1 4 5 Problem Mechanical problems Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 1 No primary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder upper lower forwarding pulleys upper lower paper feed pulleys upper lower separation pulleys feed rollers registration rollers MP forward ing pulley MP paper feed pulley and MP sep aration pulley Clean with isopropyl alcohol Check if the upper lower forwarding pulleys upper lower paper feed pulleys or upper lower separation pulleys is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 2 Check if the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or MP sepa
23. Replace the punch PWB and check for cor rect operation Backup memory data problem optional mail box of 3000 sheet doc ument finisher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the mail box main PWB and the connector YC7 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective mail box main PWB Replace the mail box main PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the centerfold main PWB and the connector YC5 on the finisher main PWB and the con tinuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold main PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 41 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures DP communication problem optional DP A communication error is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC7 on the scanner PWB and the connector of the DP and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main P
24. 1 5 6 Stop ring MP paper feed pully shaft Figure 1 5 13 Stop ring MP paper feed clutch Figure 1 5 14 MP forwarding pully shaft Figure 1 5 15 2GN 2GP 2GR 13 Remove the stop ring of the MP paper feed pulley shaft and slide the bushing in the Bushing direction of the arrow Stop ring MP paper feed pully shaft Figure 1 5 16 14 Slide the MP forwarding pulley shaft tempo rarily toward the rear side and then raise it to remove from the MP unit Remove the shaft while raising the actuator of the MP paper switch MP forwarding pully shaft Figure 1 5 17 15 Remove the bushing an cam on the rear of the MP forwarding pulley shaft MP forwarding pully shaft Bushing Figure 1 5 18 1 5 7 2GN 2GP 2GR 16 Remove the stop ring and slide the MP for warding pulley with the forwarding pulley retainer from the shaft to remove it 17 Replace the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Stop ring A MP forwarding pully Forwarding pully retainer Figure 1 5 19 18 Install the MP forwarding pulley to the MP MP paper feed pully shaft forwarding pulley shaft 19 Refit the MP forwarding pulley shaft to the MP unit 20 Install the MP paper feed pulley to the MP unit 21 Refit the MP unit cover to the MP unit When refitting the MP unit cover the film on the cover is positioned under the MP paper feed pulley shaft 22 Install the MP s
25. 14 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in vertical conveying section Jam code 22 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 15 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in bypass conveying section Jam code 23 Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse MP feed switch registration switch 16 A paper jam in the paper conveying sec tion is indicated dur ing copying jam in registration transfer section Jam code 30 Broken feed switch 1 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 registration switch The contact between the right and left registration ro
26. A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying sub tray eject jam Jam code 84 manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 36 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying sub tray eject jam Jam code 85 Defective eject switch 3 Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 3 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 1 4 19 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 37 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying inter nal tray paper entry sensor 1 jam Jam code 86 Defective internal tray paper entry sensor 1 Run maintenance item U241 and turn internal tray paper entry sensor 1 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 38 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying inter nal tray paper entry sensor 2 jam Jam code 87 Defective internal tray paper entry sensor 2 Run maintenance item U241 and turn internal tray paper entry sensor 2 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding sw
27. CLUTCH B Paper feeder conveying clutch PFCCL CLUTCH P1 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 CLUTCH P2 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 Paper feeder Display Motor and clutches DESK FEED Paper feeder drive motor PFDM CLUTCH FEED Paper feeder feed clutch PFFCL CLUTCH U Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 CLUTCH L Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 2 Select the item to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 58 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U250 Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays and changes the maintenance cycle Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle Method Press the start key The currently set maintenance cycle is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 400000 30 ppm 500000 40 50 ppm 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the maintenance count Description Displays clears and changes the maintenance count Purpose To check the maintenance count Also to clear the count during maintenance service Met
28. Check if YC6 3 on the scanner PWB goes low when mainte nance item U061 is run If not replace the scanner PWB 1 4 45 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Image is too light Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Insufficient toner If the display shows the message requesting toner replenish ment replace the container Deteriorated toner Perform the drum refresh operation Defective transfer charging output 4 Background is visible The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 10 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 5 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Deteriorated toner Perform the drum refresh operation Dirty main charger wire 5 A white line appears longitudinally Copy example Causes Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 25 Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 46 Foreign matter in the developing unit Che
29. Description Resets all of the counts back to 0 Purpose To start the counters with value 0 when installing the machine Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared CANNOT EXECUTE is displayed if the count cannot be cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 78 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts Purpose To check the machine life counts Method Press the start key The current machine life counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U933 Setting the backup kit Description Initializes optional data backup kit CF and restore the backup data Purpose To initialize the CF when call for service C0700 occurs Also to restore data when the hard disk has been damaged Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description INITIALIZE CF Initializes the data backup kit CF and backs up the job accounting data in the hard disk into the data backup kit CF FAX IMAGE Prints the fax reception data backed up in the data backup kit CF JO
30. ENGINE ENGINE BOOT SCANNER OPTION LANGUAGE DICTIONARY DP LCF OPTION CASSETTE DF MAIN DF MTRAY DF SADDLE DF MAILBOX INNER DF SIMPLE DF MAIN FAX BOOT1 FAX APL1 FAX IPL1 FAX BOOT2 FAX APL2 FAX IPL2 Main PWB ROM IC Operation PWB ROM IC Engine PWB ROM IC Engine PWB booting Scanner PWB ROM IC Optional language ROM IC Optional DP main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000 sheet paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000 sheet document finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000 sheet document finisher internal tray PWB ROM IC Optional centerfold main PWB ROM IC Optional mail box main PWB ROM IC Optional built in finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional document sheet finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional fax control PWB booting Optional fax control PWB APL Optional fax control PWB IPL Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 13 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U020 1 3 14 Initializing all data Description Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PWB to return to the original settings Refer to 1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metri
31. Press the status key Enter 10871087 using i Maintenance mode is entered the numeric keys Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up down keys The maintenance item is or numeric keys selected Y Press the start key y The selected maintenance item is run y Press the stop key Repeat the same maintenance item Run another maintenance item Enter 001 using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited and press the start key End 1 3 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Maintenance modes item list Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting General Outputting an own status report Exiting the maintenance mode Setting the factory default data e e e e e e e e e RK IRI Setting the service telephone number Displaying the machine number Copying without paper Displaying the ROM version Initialization Initializing all data Initializing counters and mode settings Initializing backup memory HDD formatting Drive paper Checking motor operation feed paper Checking switches for paper conveying conveying and cooling system Checking solenoid operation Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration 245 0 30 30 Adjusting the center line 490 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting the printing area for folio paper Leng
32. Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feeder paper conveying motor error optional 3000 sheet paper feeder The lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 450 ms Paper feeder drive motor error optional paper feeder The lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 500 ms Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Paper feeder paper conveying motor paper feeder drive motor does not rotate correctly the motor is over loaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Defective PWB Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct opera tion Defective motor Replace the paper feeder paper conveying motor paper feeder drive motor Scanner carriage problem The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the table Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC4 on the scanner PWB and the connector on the scanner home position switch and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Defective scanner home position switch Replace the scanner ho
33. ing edge registration see page 1 3 24 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Feed clutch paper feed clutch MP paper feed clutch or registration clutch installed or operating incor rectly 13 Paper creases Copy example Causes Check the installation position and operation of each clutch If any of them operates incorrectly replace it Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 48 Paper curled Check the paper storage conditions Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Defective separation Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws 14 Offset occurs Copy example Causes 2GN 2GP 2GR Check procedures corrective measures 4 Defective cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Defective fuser unit Check the heat roller and press roller Wrong types of paper 15 Image is partly missing Copy example Causes Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Check procedures corrective measures 4 Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Paper creased Change the paper Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation
34. tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the lower paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the lower paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the lower paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 51 1 4 11 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 4 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from optional cassette 3 Jam code 12 Optional paper feeder Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley forwarding pulley and separation pulley of optional cassette 3 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch pan
35. 1 29 1 1 21 1 0 78 1 0 64 1 0 50 1 0 25 Copy Sp ed e ee eeeeeeeeeteeteeeeseetees At 100 magnification in copy mode 30 ppm model A3 Ledger 20 sheets min B4 Legal 20 sheets min A4 Letter 30 sheets min A4R LetterR 22 sheets min B5 30 sheets min B5R 20 sheets min A5R StatementR 14 sheets min A6R 16 sheets min 40 ppm model A3 Ledger 23 sheets min B4 Legal 23 sheets min A4 Letter 40 sheets min A4R LetterR 27 sheets min B5 40 sheets min B5R 22 sheets min A5R StatementR 16 sheets min A6R 18 sheets min 50 ppm model A3 Ledger 26 sheets min B4 Legal 26 sheets min A4 Letter 50 sheets min A4R LetterR 31 sheets min B5 50 sheets min B5R 24 sheets min A5R StatementR 18 sheets min A6R 18 sheets min First COPY time oce 3 9 s or less 30 ppm model 3 5 s or less 40 50 ppm model Warm up time eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 s room temperature 22 C 71 6 F 60 RH Recovery from sleep mode 15 s room temperature 22 C 71 6 F 60 RH Paper feed sySteM ceeeeeeee Automatic feed Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m Manual feed Capacity MP tray 200 sheets 80 g m Paper eject system eec Output tray 250 sheets 80 g m 2GN 2GP 2GR Multiple copying seese PhotoconduCtor seeren Charging SyYStem ssseseeseeeeeeeeeeeene Recording system eeeeceee Developing system sses Transfer system eeen Separation system ceeeeeerees FUSING SY
36. 2GN 2GP 2GR U000 Detail of event log System version Description System date Paper Jam Log Count Event Remembers 1 to 16 of occurrence If the occurrence of the previ ous paper jam is less than 16 all of the paper jams are logged When the occurrence excessed 16 the oldest occurrence is removed The total page count at the time of the paper jam Log code 2 digit hexa decimal 5 categories a Cause of a paper jam b Paper source c Paper size d Paper type e Paper eject Service Call Log Count Service Code Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of self diag nostics error If the occurrence of the previ ous diagnostics error is less than 8 all of the diagnostics errors are logged The total page count at the time of the self diagnostics error Self diagnostic error code See page 1 4 22 Maintenance Log Count Item Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of replace ment If the occurrence of the previous replace ment of toner container is less than 8 all of the occurrences of replace ment are logged The total page count at the time of the replace ment of the toner con tainer Code of maintenance replacing item 1 byte 2 categories First byte Replacing item 01 Toner container 02 Maintenance kit Second byte Type of replacing item 00 fixed Counter Log Comprised of three log counters inc
37. 30 ppm 1370 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold paper entry sensor CPES is not turned off within specified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold eject switch CESW is not turned on within specified time 3040 ms The centerfold eject switch CESW is not turned off 4213 ms within specified time of its turning on Centerfold side registration sensor 1 CSRS1 is not 600 ms turned on within specified time Centerfold side registration sensor 2 CSRS2 is not 600 ms turned on within specified time 89 The home position is not detected within the specified 1000 ms Jam in centerfold unit 3000 sheet document finisher only time after driving the centerfold staple motor CSTM The centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS is not turned off within specified time 4528 ms 30 ppm 3504 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS is not turned on within specified time 4528 ms 30 ppm 3504 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 90 Jam in mail box 3000 sheet document finisher only The mail paper entry switch MPESW is not turned on within specified time 1315 ms 30 ppm 1017 ms 40 50 ppm The mail paper entry switch MPESW is not turned off within specified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm
38. Corrective measures 6 Paper jams Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace any deformed guides Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the contact between the feed roller and feed pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed Clean or replace the press roller Check if the contact between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct Repair if any springs are off the separation claws Check if the contact between the eject roller and pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary The feedshift solenoid malfunctions See page 1 4 51 Check if the duplex feed pulley upper duplex feed roller or lower duplex feed roller is deformed Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed 7 Toner drops on the paper conveying path Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty Clean the developing unit 8 Abnormal noise is heard 1 4 56 Check if the pulleys rollers and gears operate smoothly Grease the bearings and gears Check if the following clutches are installed correctly upper lower paper feed clutches feed clutches 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch and MP feed c
39. EIE on VS for ee L z z ala Mefe Hn sa sa oe oe anos HeH zr on pe 2 f eL m 62 6z ez ez S m ta is Jo va va ps ez ez anos ele a aE ziaja O ea ea T tz a Zz a kale 7 ae 9 3 Salen za ea zi 5 gt Ha E O Z a a Dear Ap 2 j P O re ve ou s YAZ ro ey et 5 3 O a ele r z 2 IY y vye osa gt 2 g i ez ee anos lez Jou for gt 2 Lev ee EWEN peva z Z pete pew PEPE lS Le z ew fev awe ino 3 oz oz oz oz lt ov ov ThW EW eee Eat lt ve a s a ew wi 61 6h er 6r E sv sv orv fory oa s xt z 81 81 et 81 oO a ov ov 6y 6v aNoS EJET aE mr o Ha gt Ce S zy ZV ev ev O 9 9 m o eHe te Udare ev ev lv iv st st 9 Si St aAa Sv bv 2 re Tosca a Eto aes e E mane e JE F s er er eo EHE i i EV sv sv O A zt et bv pv 9 Pete e Ee oto Fanos LHe zle 3a 58 ev ev fete M o Ee ug za va av ev 2 efe Fi ee 3a 8 w i a ete a EE EIEE 2 2 9 9 9 9 to Jar va ta GNSS le e Jele S s a ee olll lolol oral za gt Ean v ZAI A oa a lt restos a ol Fol bora for ESS sa oa Te Sose efe e E 5 ajojo aa aja L sa ONS ejz FE S BRIE Tu lt N S m ij i ela 69 or or ONOS RIEA O uaj ea ste Loo K2 o nfo OL a O 24e DIS DNIAdOO gt z9 a T i m a ca 6a a E OZ lt a re har D u tle aag za ea a o EAEE EJS Tat O aNd INNOD 0333 o az gt e E 9
40. Esty op PLL ia 1 a NJOS 9a 98 ea i 1 5 cla za za za gt a 1 e Te ro 1 Q sajesa S y 1 yn a 6a 68 oa 1 1 orafors ONS re i a PS Guava ANC z am O 5 ay c gt a a vivr oN T er et Sn z a omg 3 e E a te Ea 2 5 Ej gt l O 8 EZE Li it ON ud E gt gt e aNd ojo 5 BG gt 5 1 S Z I ko zz al Z 2lo 9 fa mSda3 e 6 BOAHL 5 z Fale Ele Z z 3 e am PA Q O a alla fa CAS s e a x JF S AFA EE 5 g s gt ae pL ajajaa a z x TENGEN WI 1IL 7 a l a iT ol je ESN LI LCI Ld Hoia he G31 GAS ote mamn E S le elelsfelele EZ i9 ate ZOSSI sfs h E I falos foo S GOR a Tossa A TOAH gt lt 4 a A E z ano ae See eee 6 z ee ee pave t st AE Q SISSI z22lllaeae HL we Bee JINT a 3 z S S SIS1S1S1S S 5 51 2151 315 g5 me i Jo masa l Zz JE va OD o LOA LOA LOA IOA ZOA S g5 2 9 gt 1 efje gt a Zz t m t or or OF z O iE vialrre Zl lo ce ce GNSS Tee E x 1 O25 8 TAS aa cralera al lol lal S l Ie S ee ee NOS Tee Tee xa i zoi 2 OND os zalere O S lal jz 2 jal Js fol Jz _IS _ Hefe y ie 9 oar ale najua Q 2 9 Slol lo Hi oH a o lol lalSlol2lo alalalala as pete 9 x g Hasy eTe aalsa gt al epe M e rc wc m ie ae gagag gagala azzal se se se se 3 iz id Tas B36 6a 6a ve ve PAs Hete 9 e 1Z ol amp lt oas EEH 2a 69 uornonroo LENLE unsoonroogrNLF ee ee ONS feefee ts Z 08 zaia
41. If none remedy or replace the cable Defective adjust ment motor Replace adjustment motor The adjustment home position sen sor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective adjust ment home posi tion sensor Replace the adjustment home position sen sor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Finisher front side registration motor problem optional built in finisher When the front side registration home position sensor is turned on during initial ization the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses When the front side registration home position sensor is turned off during initial ization the sensor did not turn on in three seconds The front side reg istration motor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective front side registration motor Replace front side registration motor The front side reg istration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective front side registration home position sensor Replace the front side r
42. Key counter retainer P N 66060030 Key counter cover retainer P N 66060022 Key counter mount P N 66060040 Key counter socket assembly P N 41529210 Two 2 M3 x 6 bronze flat head screws P N B2303060 One 1 M4 x 30 tap tight S screw P N B1B54300 Four 4 M4 x 6 bronze TP screws P N B4304060 Two Two 2 M4 x 10 bronze TP screws P N B4304100 One 1 M3 x 8 bronze binding screw P N B1303080 One 1 M4 x 6 chrome TP screw P N B4104060 One 1 M4 x 20 tap tight S screw P N 7BB100420H One 1 M3 bronze nut P N C2303000 Two 2 M4 x 10 tap tight screws P N B3024100 2 M4 x 10 tap tight P screws P N B8014100 Procedure 1 Press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key counter retainer using the two screws and nut 3 Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using the two screws and attach the key counter retainer to the mount using the two screws 4 Remove the scanner right cover and the upper right cover 5 Cut out the aperture plate on the upper right cover using nippers 6 Pass the connect inside the machine through the aperture and refit the upper right cover and scanner right cover M3 nut C2303000 M3 x 6 flat head screws B2303060 2GN 2GP 2GR M4 x 6
43. Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 77 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U910 Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheet Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXCUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The accumulated black ratio data is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes Purpose To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts Method Press the start key The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed Clearing 1 Select the paper size To clear all counts press the clear key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts Purpose To check the copy counts Method Press the start key The current counts of copy counter printer counter and fax counter are displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only
44. Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective DIMM Replace the DIMM and check for correct operation 1 4 23 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures DMA problem DMA transmission of compressed decompressed rotated relocated or blanked out image data does not com plete within the specified period of time Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Hard disk drive problem The hard disk cannot be accessed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC49 on the main PWB and the connector on the hard disk Repair or replace if necessary Defective hard disk Run U024 HDD formatting without turning the power off to initialize the hard disk Replace the hard disk drive and check for correct operation if the problem is still detected after initialization Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation CF error for backup Optional data backup kit CF is not suit able as backup CF installed incor rectly Install CF correctly Defective CF Install normal CF Image processing problem JAMO05 is detected twice Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Flash ROM program area checksum error optional fax A checksum error occurred with the pro gram i
45. Select the item to be set The screen for setting each item is displayed Display Description FINISHER 3000 Adjustment of the 3000 sheet document finisher BOOKLET FOLDER Adjustment of the centerfold unit FINISHER B IN Adjustment of the built in finisher Setting 3000 sheet document finisher 1 Select the item to be set Display Description PUNCH REG ADJ Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode PUNCH POS ADJ Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode WIDTH F HP ADJ Adjustment of front side registration home position WIDTH R HP ADJ Adjustment of rear side registration home position STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of front and back stapling home position T STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of slanted stapling home position Setting adjustment of registration stop timing 1 Select PUNCH REG ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of registration stop timing 20 to 20 0 1 ms Description If skewed paper conveying occurs sample 1 increase the preset value If the copy paper is Z folded sample 2 decrease the preset value lt lt lt S Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 18 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U246 Setting adjustm
46. home position sen sor Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 37 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Stapler moving motor 1 error optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 1 5 s passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC9 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler moving motor 1 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective stapler moving motor 1 Replace stapler moving motor 1 Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Stapler problem optional document finisher When the stapler motor is driving the ON status of the stapler home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed The stapler con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The stapler is blocked with a sta ple Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the sta pler The
47. jam Jam code 92 1 4 20 Defective eject sensor With 5 V DC present at CN5 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN5 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the eject sen sor Check if the paper convey ing motor malfunctions Check Check if the eject roller and eject pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the eject guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 43 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying reverse sensor jam Defective reverse sensor With 5 V DC present at CN14 5 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the reverse sensor Check if the reverse motor malfunctions Check Jam code 93 Check if the reverse roller Check and remedy and reverse pulley contact each other Check if the reverse guide Check and remedy is deformed Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation PWB 44 Extremely curled paper Change the paper A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper entry sensor
48. pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 5VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC CLOCK signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal SBSY signal SDIR signal EGIRN signal OUTPEN signal PVSYNC signal 5 V DC power output Ground Ground LDON signal PRST signal PMD signal HLDENG signal Maintenance parts list 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance part name Part No Alternative Fig Ref Name used in service manual Name used in parts list part No No No Upper lower paper feed pulley PULLEY PAPER FEED 2AR07220 4 2 Upper lower separation pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 2AR07230 4 3 Upper lower forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 4 5 MP paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY BYPASS 61706770 11 49 MP separation pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 2AR07230 11 2 MP forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 11 6 MP feed roller 1 ROLLER2 BYPASSFEED 302BL06541 2BL06541 12 13 MP feed roller 2 ROLLER4 BYPASSFEED 302BL06561 2BL06561 12 14 MP feed pulley RIGHT PULLEY FEED 33906660 12 22 Left registration roller ROLLER REGIST 2FG16021 7 35 Right registration roller RIGHT ROLLER REGIST 302FG06211 2FG06211 5 51 Feed pulley PULLEY FEED 2BL16080 6 7 47 19 Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED A 302GR06010 2GR06010 5 72 Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED B 302GR06020 2GR06020 5 73 Feed roller 2 ROLLER B FEED 302BL06081 2BL06081
49. remove the C ring ground plate bearing and bushing on the front side Replace the heat roller and install the roller to fuser unit C ring Bushing Heat roller 8 Gear Bearing Ground plate Bushing C ring Figure 1 5 66 Refit the fuser gear Refit the fuser heater press roller and upper fuser cover Refit the fuser unit 1 5 32 Bearing 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 2 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 3 Release the stopper of the fuser unit ther mistor 1 4 Remove the connector and remove the fuser unit thermistor 1 5 Replace the fuser unit thermistor 1 and install the thermistor to fuser unit Connector Fuser unit thermistor 1 Figure 1 5 67 6 Remove the press roller and fuser heater see page 1 5 30 and 31 7 Remove the heat roller see page 1 5 32 8 Remove the screw and the connector and then remove the fuser unit thermistor 2 9 Replace the fuser unit thermistor 2 and install the thermistor to fuser unit 10 Refit the heat roller fuser heater press roller od and upper fuser cover oe CF 11 Refit the fuser unit i Connector Figure 1 5 68 1 5 33 2GN 2GP 2GR 7 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral squareness Follow the procedure be
50. 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected BLACK Initialization of original reading position Setting standard data when dust is detected 1 Select the item to be set 2 Change the value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting CCD R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust 0 to 255 175 CCDG Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 170 CCD B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0 to 255 160 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting Initialization of original reading position 1 Select CLEAR 2 Press the start key The setting is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 33 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U089 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP PG pattern created in the machine Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing using MIP PG pattern output with out scanning Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the MIP PG pattern to be output Display PG pattern to be output Purpose GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit z EI engine output characteristics MONO LEVEL To check the d
51. 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 COUNTO is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights 3 As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bot tom the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1 When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right the top LED in that line will light 4 When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 46 Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Description Sets the size of paper used in optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Purpose To change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the paper size A4 B5 or Letter Initial setting Letter Inch specifications A4 Metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance er item No Description U220_ Setting the trial functions Description Enables the trial of USB functions by period limitati
52. 10 NC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC CFM11 12 13 On Off Duplex unit distinction signal 24 V DC power output CFM8 9 10 On Off Not used YC11 Connected to the drive motor paper feed motor feed clutch 1 and feed switch 1 ON Oa FWD a me wn sm ig oar OUO N O R24VDR R24VDR GND GND 5VD 5VD GND GND DM_ON PFM_ON DM_LOCK PFM_LOCK DM_CLK FCL1 24VDR GND Fsw1 5VD 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output Ground Ground 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output Ground Ground DM On Off PFM On Off DM LOCK signal PFM LOCK signal DM CLOCK signal FCL1 On Off 24 V DC power output Ground FSW1 On Off 5 V DC power output Connected to the Upper and lower paper size width switches 4 4 oP AN OA FW NY o lk fo 24VDR 24VUP PWSW U0 PWSW U1 PWSW U2 GND 24VDR 24VLO PWSW LO PWSW L1 PWSW L2 GND 24V DC 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power input PWSW U On Off PWSW U On Off PWSW U On Off Ground 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power input PWSW L On Off PWSW L On Off PWSW L On Off Ground 2 3 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC13 Connected to the feed switch 2 3 feed clutch 2 3 left cover 2
53. 200 40 50 ppm 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 42 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U163 Resetting the fuser problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The fuser problem data is initialized 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Checking fuser counts Description Displays fuser counts for checking Purpose To check fuser counts after replacing the fuser unit Method Press the start key The fuser counts are displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Turning the fuser heater on Description Turns the fuser heater M or S on Purpose To check fuser heaters turning on Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the heater to be turned on The selected heater turns on for 2 s and then turns off Display Description MAIN Fuser heater M FH M SUB Fuser heater S FH S Completion Press the stop key when fuser heaters M and S are off The screen for selectin
54. 220 240 V AC 120 VAC 220 240 V AC 3 3 V DC power output AC power output AC power output 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output 5 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground 12 V DC power output Ground Ground 5 V DC power output 24 V DC power output 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground Not used 2GN 2GP 2GR ro Connector YC10 Connected to the main PWB Voltage Description 0 5 V DC SLEEP signal 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground o NOONAN OO0O0O0O000 0 a me wn sm ig oar Won O 1 1 1 2 3 4 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 3 2 Engine PWB Engine PWB Optional finisher MPWB Optional EEPROM U3 Switches Sensors Clutches Motors Address bus Engine G A HVTPWB U8 Reset IC U9 LSU Figure 2 3 3 Engine PWB diagram paper feeder YC22 Lh 4 YC24 is _YC20 wC 7 eT 14 YC8 1 ig YC23 C E B15 14 YC7 1 ais YC6 ai L h B14 B1 LC Lt Ld o YC5 YC16 YC19 aig YC13 At Ale YC14 ai a ie lt x m g 1 12 12 1 Bi BIg BI BiG YC1 YC2 ij YC3 Ale C18 a A11 A1 YC15 B1 B11 i f 1 8 BO BI YC10 YC
55. 490 1 0mm MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 1 Paper feed from cassette 1 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 2 Paper feed from cassette 2 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 3 Paper feed from optional cassette 3 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 4 Paper feed from optional cassette 4 500 to 500 1 0 mm DUPLEX Duplex mode second 500 to 500 1 0 mm Setting the difference value from reference value Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 decrease the value For output example 2 increase the value Center line of printing Fs Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 5 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U067 U072 P 1 3 25 P 1 3 30 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using th
56. APEE A EA AE AE E A E E ied does awecs Sbesazentebes ieee hatin Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier s INStrUCTION NANCGDOOK EEA E EEE ATA EEA T 2 Precautions for Maintenance AAWARNING Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related broshur s akea iiih a aia Ba e a n a a r GA a a a A S Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms ANC protective Creul roras E EA EE A EE A NE S Always use parts having the correct specifications ssseesssssesrsssssrrsssrirrnsstinnnnnttnnnnnttnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn S Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related bro chure when replacing them Using a piece of wire for example could lead to fire or other serious Q eloo T E eA EE E E AT E A A E AET When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part always use the correct scale and measure carefully cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees Q Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection e Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty
57. CE s s KO zi WOLLOS gt jam og Ce a aval ee oZ ail S n amdo Q ely ely efe Na Nee oo i pai ae Hans Sty stv L L uak BEL ay aera pera eee 1 General wiring diagram 2 4 9 DRUM UNIT DEVELOPING UNIT KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 8444 FAX 973 882 6000 New York Branch 1410 Broadway 23rd floor New York NY 10018 TEL 917 286 5400 FAX 917 286 5402 Northeastern Region 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 8444 FAX 973 882 4401 Midwestern Region 201 Hansen Court Suite 119 Wood Dale Illinois 60191 TEL 630 238 9982 FAX 630 238 9487 Western Region 14101 Alton Parkway Irvine California 92618 7006 TEL 949 457 9000 FAX 949 457 9119 KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 6120 Kestrel Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 1S8 Canada TEL 905 670 4425 FAX 905 670 8116 KYOCERA MITA MEXICO S A DE C V Av 16 de Septiembre 407 Col Santa In s Azcapotzalco M xico D F 02130 M xico TEL 55 5383 2741 FAX 55 5383 7804 2006 KYOCERA MITA Corporation http www kyoceramita com ci KYOCERG is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Southeastern Region 1500 Oakbrook Drive Norcross Georgia 30093 TEL 770 729 9786 FAX 770 729 9873 Southwestern Region 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 5
58. D MARGIN BACK Trailing edge margin second 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm page Display Description Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Leading edge margin 3 1 5mm Ejection direction 4 reference Left margin Right margin at 2 1 0mm 2 1 0mm i t Trailing edge margin 2 1 0mm Figure 1 3 26 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 67 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U407 1 3 68 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original dur ing memory copying Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 U402 U066 U403 U071 P 1 3 18 P 1 3 65 P 1 3 24 P 1 3 66 P 1 3 28 U404 U407 P 1 3 67 Adjustment 1 Press the start key Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value p
59. Developing bias control voltage 24 V DC power output Ground Main charging On Off Developing bias CLOCK signal Separation charging On Off Separation charging control voltage Transfer charging control voltage Developing bias control voltage Transfer charging On Off Not used Not used Not used Not used Connected to the laser scanner unit ON OO FR WD ae ee E hs ee BonM 0 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 24VDR GND SCAN SCRDYN SCCLK 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 24 V DC power output Ground PM On Off PM READY signal PM CLOCK signal 2 3 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC9 Connected to the MP feed switch toner con tainer sen sor developing unit toner feed sole noid toner container detection switch and drum unit GND MPFSW 5VD 5VD TCS GND DEVPO 5VD TNS GND DVUNITN FUSE_CUT EEDATA EESCLK 24VDR TNFSOL TCDSW GND DRUMPO GND CL EEDATA EESCLK GND DRUNITN 5VD MCCM_FWD MCCM_REV 0 5 V DC 5VDC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC Ground MPFSW On Off 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output TCS On Off
60. If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB 2 No image appears entirely black Copy example Causes Check if developing bias is output when CN1 14 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Check procedures corrective measures No main charging Broken main charger wire Replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 25 Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 4 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U100 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if main charging takes place when CN1 11 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Exposure lamp fails to light Poor contact in the expo sure lamp connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective inverter PWB Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1 3 on the inverter PWB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run If not replace the inverter PWB Defective scanner PWB
61. JAPAN METRIC Metric Japan specifications INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications Initial setting INCH Inch specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 47 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U236_ Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built in finisher Description If the machine is equipped with an optional built in finisher this mode sets whether A5R B5R statement size paper is output to the machine eject tray or not Purpose If the machine is equipped with an optional built in finisher and if paper jams occur due to curling of paper in the built in ejection section when two sided copying onto A5R B5R statement size paper is performed this mode is used to change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine eject tray Method Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Does not eject to the machine eject tray OFF Eject to the machine eject tray Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting finisher stack quantity Description Sets the number of sheets of
62. MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn off within specified time of the MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL turning on 5056 ms 30 ppm 3913 ms 40 50 ppm 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Paper 22 The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci 1910 ms 30 ppm feed Multiple sheets in verti fied time of the feed switch 2 FSW2 turning off 1478 ms 40 50 ppm section cal conveying section Tie feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci 1989 ms 30 ppm fied time of the feed switch 3 FSW3 turning off 1539 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci 1910 ms 30 ppm fied time of the feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on 1478 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci 1904 ms 30 ppm fied time of the feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on 1474 ms 40 50 ppm 23 The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 3539 ms 30 ppm Multiple sheets in MP specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning 2739 ms 40 50 ppm tray conveying section off The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 3933 ms 30 ppm specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning 3043 ms 40 50 ppm on Paper 30 The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 1511 ms 30 ppm conveying Misfeed in registration specified time of the feed switch 1 FSW1 turning off 1170 ms 40 50 ppm Sennen B
63. Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated The selected operation starts Display Description MC ON Turning the main charger on LASER ON OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off 3 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key when main charger output stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Setting the other high voltages Description Sets the developing bias control voltage the transfer control voltage and the separation control voltage or checks the output of these voltages Purpose To check the developing bias the transfer voltage and the separation voltage or to take measures against drop of image density or background fog Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting DEV BIAS Developing bias AC component frequency at 20 to 32 28 image formation DEV SBIAS Developing shift bias potential at image for 0to3 mation DEV DUTY Developing bias AC component duty at image 0 to 100 formation TC DATA Transfer control voltage 0 to 300 SC DATA Separation control voltage 0 to 60 20 Increasing the DEV BIAS setting makes the image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter Increasing the DEV SBIAS setting makes the image darker Increasing the DEV DUTY setting makes the
64. RRISE S a ofr o eafr ej s fo sa 89 noe o e 6a 6a i 8 Ola Jorg ele JII 1 H TNOHL Faire oa fl Bed Hel dalal 5 Ee sa sa lt S S15 a a 219 2 2 21 3 a 4 ioe ata NA alalala ala lal els lal ala zte lel telzteletel lalzla 4 W B 2 213 3 21513 5 215 B B21 lz S aleaz Elz lt 5 ape fa z bal kad hal 4 ete a ka 1 eal ti E ra fe to q ere va rd Eas gt i z 2 sal Ld ad 4 Gn 1104d 5 L ee EEE EEEREREREREEE x afa mor Ee a lalolsfololslololel lsel le elelelole lalelelsielsle lz la 3 x Magd za zg F itz Q FERRE cd ard ond eo acd GS Kad sd Kd Koel Kd td Ka zji amp a a FE SJelslece o Baie ow pa Sle 5 ajajajaja SS a nfs aja a Sle o Bg sy baal Fd OD ad ST o f a g Elali gt o E o 4 b O N saf ME HY ke 0004 oO ay C NIOTH GAS a 3 Oo A gt nje mn ee 9 EEJ oe i gt gt efle mir e er a a 1 1 oealocal oeafoca a isud oy Lov GAS 1 NO SOA 99A uje lt mr sv Sv anst 1 y 1 S GNDS ov lov GAS 1 i alia ahal a Z O oje aos ee wia Con E i oevloev oevloev O a D ef HOAs 4 6 cast 7 g 2 Eie e ete av ev x a 2 Z LWIA Zia ol HH soos HE ojo KE eg lt lt w iv w iv ba g 8 gt apd eS ats ovo avn doo ta 4 L 5 E T N O afir REEE l Talia GAve i os 1 ios a Te 1 13N gt gt gt D 5 ried eS a l ioo Mes 1 a s H Ps asn 3HL3 9 N gt efen on 212 seo ee Xa O z fe soa gt eHe salsa a 52 1 Pa a gt
65. Toner loaded after simplex copying Initial setting MODE2 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the on off status of each sensor or switch related to toner Purpose To check if the sensors and switches operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a switch is detected that switch is displayed in reverse Display Switches DEVELOPER SENSOR Toner sensor TNS CONTAINER SET Toner container detection switch TCDSW CONTAINER SNSR Toner container sensor TCS WASTE BOX SET Waste toner detection switch WTDSW WASTE BOX SENSOR Overflow sensor OFS MOTOR ON The toner feed solenoid TNFSOL and the paper feed motor PFM are turned on To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 41 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U157__ Checking clearing the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking or clearing a figure which is used as a reference when cor recting the toner control Purpose To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit Method Press the start key The developing drive time is disp
66. ainiin ag Detects a paper jam in the duplex section 2 2 3 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Motors 9 00 20 OVP EN Ee Cooling fan motor 5 CFM5 Cooling fan motor 6 Cooling fan motor 7 CFM7 Cooling fan motor 4 CFM4 Cooling fan motor 11 CFM11 Cooling fan motor 12 CFM12 Cooling fan motor 13 CFM13 Polygon motor PM eener Drives the polygon mirror Main charger cleaning motor MCCM Drives the main charger auto cleaning Machine front UZ Machine inside C Machine rear Figure 2 2 3 Motors Drive motor DM secese Drives the machine Paper feed motor PFM esssssceecsere Drives paper feed section Upper lift motor LM U seee Drives cassette 1 lift Lower lift motor LM L Drives cassette 2 lift Scanner motor SM eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Drives the optical system Eject motor EM e Drives the eject section Cooling fan motor 1 CFM1 ee eee Cools the machine interior Cools the machine interior Cools the machine interior Cools the machine interior around the power supply unit Cools the machine interior around the LSU Cools the machine interior controller box Cools the machine interior operation panel Cooling fan motor 2 CFM2 Cooling fan motor 3 CFM3 Cooling fan motor 8 CFM8 Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Cooling fan motor 9 CFM9 Cools
67. all the way into the machine until it locks in place Install the waste toner box 1 Install the waste toner box in the machine 2 Close the front cover Install the optional original cover or the DP 1 Install the optional original cover or DP Install other optional devices 1 Install the optional devices job separator built in finisher document finisher and or fax kit etc as necessary Connect the power cord 1 2 Toner container Figure 1 2 12 Waste toner box Figure 1 2 13 Connect the power cord to the connector on the machine Insert the power plug into the wall outlet 1 2 8 2GN 2GP 2GR Install the fixing brackets Remove two screws from the rear cover 2 Hook the catch of fixing bracket onto the groove of round frame and secure it using two screws removed before step Grooves e Fixing brackets Figure 1 2 14 Carry out initial developer setting maintenance item U130 Turn the main power switch on and press the status key Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter 130 using the numeric keys and press the start key Press the start key to execute the maintenance item The drive stops within approximately 5 minutes Press the stop key al ele Output an own status report maintenance item U000 1 Enter 00
68. claw CLAW PRESS ROLLER 2BL20350 a 6 34 2 4 1 Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No Alternative part No 2GN 2GP 2GR z 9 Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley ROLLER DU FEED UP ROLLER DU FEED LOW PULLEY DU 2BL07020 2BL07030 2BL07040 N Eject roller Switchback roller Eject pulley Eject pulley Switchback pulley ROLLER EXIT ROLLER FEED SHIFT PULLEY EXIT C PULLEY EXIT PULLEY FEED SHIFT 302BL21021 302BL21031 2BL21520 302GR28060 2BL21330 2BL21021 2BL21031 2GR28060 O OJN N Dust filter 1 Dust filter 1 PARTS FILTER DUST F1 ASSY PARTS FILTER DUST F2 ASSY 302GR94430 302GR94440 2GR94430 2GR94440 a ot w w 2 4 2 Periodic maintenance procedures Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions 2GN 2GP 2GR Test copy and test print Section Perform at the maxi mum copy size Maintenance part location Test copy Method Every service Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Paper feed section Upper lower paper feed pulley Upper lower separation pulley Upper lower forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pulley MP forwarding pulley MP feed roller 1 MP feed pulley MP feed roller 2 Left registration roller Right registration roller Feed
69. clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric SHOCK 2 0 2 2 22 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseentenaeees Q Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may damage eyes sorra a E R A E A TT aeeaea ay eee Q Handle the charger sections with care They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly c eee cence eee eeene ee eee Aa AARAA ENSA AARE PAAA ATOAN KE Nar A ENAR KANCA CRE EANA RAER AN A CAUTION e Wear safe clothing If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections sessesseeesesssrsssrrrrrsssrinnsssrennnnsennn AN e Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine Keep away from chains and belts A e Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot eeesscesssesrssse A e Check that the fixing unit thermistor heat and press rollers are clean Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures useri reae e R AE EA AS EEEE A EE AR S Q Do not remove the ozone filter if any from the copier except for routine replacement 065 S Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high voltage components when removing them always hold the plug itself eee cece eee eeee eee ee eeeee cesses eaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeecaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeees S Do not route the p
70. clutches humidity sensor eject motor FSSOL2 FSSOL1 24VDR GND FSSW 5VD GND NC 5VD GND ESW 5VD CFM5 GND GND LC1SW PFCL U 24VDR 24VDR PFCL L 24VDR RCL 3VD HUMS GND THOUT EM _B EMB EM_A EMA NC NC O O O O O O O OO0O00 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 3 3 V DC 0to5VDC 0to5VDC 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse FSSOL On Off return FSSOL On Off activate 24 V DC power output Ground FSSW On Off 5 V DC power output Ground Not used 5 V DC power output Ground ESW On Off 5 V DC power output CFMB On Off Ground Ground LC1SW On Off PFCL U On Off 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output PFCL L On Off 24 V DC power output RCL On Off 3 3 V DC power output HUMS detection voltage signal Ground Thermistor detection voltage signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal Not used Not used Connected to the total counter optional key card and optional key counter Oo AN Oa KRW N 4 oO 24VDR T_COUNT GND SET SIG GND SET SIG 24VDR K_COUNT GND SET SIG 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC power output Total counter signal Ground Connection signal Ground
71. counter Method Press the start key Past record of 5 cases is displayed Display Description MACHINE No 1 to 5 Past record of machine number COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of drum counter Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 40 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U130 Initial setting for the developing unit Description Replenishes toner to the developing unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press the start key Toner installation is started and the output value of the sensor and execution time are displayed Display Description TONER SENSOR Output value of the sensor TIME SEC Execution time Completion Press the stop key after initial setting is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description MODEO Toner not loaded MODE1 Toner loaded after simplex or duplex copying MODE2
72. diagram MP tray 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 2 Main charging section The main charging section consists of the main charger assembly drum and so on The drum is electrically charged uni formly by means of a grid to form a latent image on the surface The main charger unit charges the drum so that a latent image is formed on the surface the shield grid ensuring the charge is applied uniformly In addition the main charger unit is equipped with the main charger cleaning motor and it is cleaning automatically Main charger unit Tungsten wire Shield grid Figure 2 1 5 Main charging section YC9 B13 B14 MCCM_FWD REV vn HVTPWB ZENER PWB Figure 2 1 6 Main charging section block diagram 2 1 4 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 3 Optical section The optical section consists of the scanner mirror frame and image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unit for printing
73. for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment BLUE Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment ADJUST ORIGINAL 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions Display Description L Setting the L value Setting range 0 0 to 100 0 200 0 to 200 0 200 0 to 200 0 a Setting the a value b Setting the b value 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting ADJUST ORIGINAL MAIN 1 Measure distance from the left edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distances A 50 mm B 105 mm and C 190 mm along the auxiliary scanning direc tion 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained A C 2 B 2 2 Enter the values solved using the keys in MAIN ADJ 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting ADJUST ORIGINAL SUB 1 Measure distance from the leading edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distanc
74. image formation Developing bias AC component duty at image formation Transfer control voltage Separation control voltage Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger Displaying the drum type Checking the drum count Setting toner refresh operation Time of toner refreshment Developing bias on time 120 700 30 ppm 540 40 50 ppm Setting separation charger mode MODE1 Checking the drum number Displaying the drum history Developing Initial setting for the developing unit Setting toner loading operation MODE2 Checking sensors for toner Checking clearing the developing drive time Checking the developing count Fuser and cleaning Setting the fuser control temperature Driving start temperature when warm up starts Control temperature for displaying Ready for copying Control temperature during printing 175 30 ppm t2 185 40 50 ppm t2 190 30 ppm 200 40 50 ppm 190 30 ppm 2 200 40 50 ppm 1 2 Resetting the fuser problem data Checking fuser counts Turning the fuser heater on Checking the fuser temperature Operation panel and support equipment Turning all LEDs on Initializing the touch panel Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Checking DP operation Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter OFF COUNTER 2 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender
75. item is being executed copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U065_ Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order U065 U065 U0S3 main scanning auxiliary scanning U067 U070 P 1 3 21 direction direction P 1 3 25 P 1 3 26 Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step MAIN SCAN ADJ Scanner magnification in the main 15to 15 0 0 1 scanning direction SUB SCAN ADJ Scanner magnification in the auxil 25 to 25 0 1 iary scanning direction Adjustment main scanning direction 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 8 5 Press the
76. ms 30 ppm 1582 ms 40 50 ppm 13 No paper feed from optional cassette 4 The paper feeder feed switch PFFSW does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 turning on the clutch is then succes sively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time paper feed from optional paper feeder 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm 14 No paper feed from MP tray The MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn on within the specified time of the MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 5056 ms 30 ppm 3913 ms 40 50 ppm 15 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section 1 Paper path sensor 3 PPSENS3 does not turn on within specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 823 ms 30 ppm 637 ms 40 50 ppm 16 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section 2 Paper path sensor 2 PPSENS2 does not turn on within specified time of the paper path sensor 3 PPSENS3 turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 879 ms 30 ppm 681 ms 40 50 ppm 17 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section 3 Paper path sensor 1 PPSENS1 does not tur
77. or high If it does replace the stapler section 34 3000 sheet document finisher A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying eject sensor stay jam Defective eject switch 1 Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 1 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Jam code 83 Document finisher Defective eject sensor With 5 V DC present at CN5 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN5 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the eject sen sor Check if the paper convey Check and remedy ing motor malfunctions Check if the eject roller and Check and remedy eject pulley contact each other Check if the eject guide is Check and remedy deformed Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation PWB Built in finisher Defective paper conveying With 5 V DC present at YC2 23 on the finisher control PWB switch check if YC2 21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying switch Check if the feedshift roller Check and remedy or feedshift pulley is deformed 35 Defective eject switch 2 Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 2 on and off
78. overlay Page numbering Memo mode Density adjustment Selection of image qual ity EcoPrint mode Batch scanning Auto image rotation Inverted copying Mirror image Job finish notice File name Priority override Multi page forms Repeat copy Programmed copying Registering shortcuts 120 V AC 60 Hz 11 5A 220 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 6 3 A Document processor paper feeder 3000 sheet paper feeder 3000 sheet document finisher document finisher built in finisher job separator key counter fax kit security kit data backup kit and PDF upgrade kit Same as copying speed Same as first copy time Fast 1200 mode 600 dpi 300 dpi Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 Microsoft Windows 98 second edition Microsoft Windows NT4 0 service pack 5 or later Microsoft Windows 2000 service pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Me Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Apple Macintosh OS 9 x Apple Macintosh OS X 10 x Parallel Bi directional parallel IEEE 1284 Nibble ECP mode USB high speed 3 slots USB interface connector Optional serial interface RS 232C Network interface 10Base T 100Base TX PRESCRIBE PCL6 5e XL KPDL3 KC GL Line Printer IBM Proprinter X24E EPSON LQ 850 DIABLO 630 Scanner functions Ethernet hiies eni Network Protocol cceeeeee Transmission system s e Resolutio Nenner eri File FOrMat ccccccsecessssssseseeeeeeees Scanning Speed ceeeeeeeeeees 2GN 2GP 2GR
79. paper machine and the 3000 sheet paper feeder feeder sequence error jam Paper 10 Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within the speci 1489 ms 30 ppm feed No paper feed from fied time of upper paper feed clutch PFCL U turning on 1152 ms 40 50 ppm section cassette 1 the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 11 No paper feed from Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within the speci fied time of lower paper feed clutch PFCL L turning on 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm cassette 2 the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 12 Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within the speci 1562 ms 30 ppm No paper feed from optional cassette 3 fied time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time paper feed from optional paper feeder 1209 ms 40 50 ppm Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within the speci fied time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 2044
80. pulley Feed roller 1 Feed roller 2 Feed roller 3 Registration switch Left registration cleaner Registration guide Right registration cleaner Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Replace Replace Replace 400K 500K 400K 500K 400K 500K 400K 500K 400K 500K 400K 500K 400K 500K 400K 500K 400K 500K 40 50 400K 30 30 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 500K 40 50 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 0 50 0 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with a dry cloth Replace Replace Replace Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs 2 4 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance Method par
81. quality of the drum Do not touch the drum surface with any object Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil clean it 3 Toner Store the toner container in a cool dark place Avoid direct light and high humidity 1 5 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 2 Paper feed section 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Procedure Removing the primary paper feed units 1 Open the front cover and pull out the cas settes 1 and 2 2 Remove the screw and remove the primary paper feed unit Removing the forwarding pulley 3 Remove the stopper from the primary paper feed unit 4 Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the direction the arrow and remove from the pri mary paper feed unit 5 Remove the stop ring from the forwarding pulley retainer 6 Remove the forwarding pulley from the for warding pulley shaft 1 5 2 Forwarding pulley retainer Stopper Figure 1 5 2 Forwarding pulley retainer Forwarding pulley shaft gt Forwarding pulley Figure 1 5 3 Removing the paper feed pulley 7 8 Remove two stop rings from the primary paper feed unit Pull the paper feed pulley shaft in the direc tion of the arrow and remove the paper feed pulley Removing the separation pulley 9 10 11 1 M 13 1 p s 1 ol 16 Remove the stop rin
82. screws B4304060 Key counter retainer 66060030 Key counter mount 66060040 Key counter cover 2A360010 Se Key counter socket assembly 41529210 Figure 1 2 15 Scanner right cover Connector Upper right cover Figure 1 2 16 1 2 11 2GN 2GP 2GR 7 Pass the key counter signal cable through the aperture in the key counter cover retainer and insert into the connector of the machine 8 Seat the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture in the upper right cover 9 Fit the key counter cover with the key counter socket assembly inserted to the key counter cover retainer on the machine using the screw 10 Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly Key counter cover retainer 66060022 Key conuter cover Key counter Zt SA Z signal cable Zz a A Projection M4 x 30 screw B1B54300 Figure 1 2 17 11 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 12 Run maintenance item U204 and select ON 13 Exit the maintenance mode 14 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key counter is pulled out 15 Check that the counter counts up as prints are made 1 2 12 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 3 1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine 1 Executing a maintenance item
83. switch upper lower lift motors lower lift motor upper lower paper size length switches upper lower lift limit switches and upper lower paper switches 2 3 10 GND FSW3 5VD R24VDR FCL3 GND FSW2 5VD GND LC2SW 24VDR FCL2 LM U SW2 GND LM U SW1 GND LM U REM GND PLSW L GND PLSW U LM L SW2 GND LM L SW1 GND LM L REM GND LICSW U 5VD GND PSW U 5VD GND LICSW L 5VD GND PSW L 5VD 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC Ground FSW3 On Off 5 V DC power output 24 V DC power output FCL3 On Off Ground FSW2 On Off 5 V DC power output Ground LC2SW On Off 24 V DC power output FCL2 On Off LM U SW2 On Off Ground LM U SW1 On Off Ground LM U On Off Ground PLSW L On Off Ground PLSW U On Off LM L SW2 On Off Ground LM L SW1 On Off Ground LM L On Off Ground LICSW U On Off 5 V DC power output Ground PSW U On Off 5 V DC power output Ground LICSW L On Off 5 V DC power output Ground PSW L On Off 5 V DC power output Connector Signal Voltage 2GN 2GP 2GR Description YC14 Connected to the feed shift sole noid feedshift switch eject switch cool ing fan motor 5 left cover 1 switch upper lower paper feed
84. the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Cooling fan motor 10 CFM10 eee Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Cools the machine interior around the paper conveying Cools the machine interior around the paper conveying Cools the machine interior around the paper conveying 2 2 4 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Other electrical components OCONWARWN gt Hard disk unit HDD Machine front GA Machine inside C Machine rear Figure 2 2 4 Other electrical components Upper paper feed clutch 1 PFCL U Primary paper feed from the cassette 1 Lower paper feed clutch 2 PFCL L Primary paper feed from the cassette 2 Feed clutch 1 FCL1 eeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeneees Controls the drive of feed roller Feed clutch 2 FCL2 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees Controls the drive of feed roller Feed clutch 3 FOL eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees Controls the drive of feed roller MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL 0 Primary paper feed from the MP tray MP feed clutch MPFCL ceeseeeeeeee Controls the drive of MP feed roller Registration clutch RCL Secondary paper feed Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL eee Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Operates the feedshift guide Toner feed solenoid TNFSOL Replenishes toner Exposure lamp EL scere Expos
85. the original error N300 patch for the original error N300 patch for the original error N950 patch for the original error Cyan patch for the original error Magenta patch for the original error Yellow patch for the original error Red patch for the original error Green patch for the original error Blue patch for the original error Other error Completion 1 3 72 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed Maintenance item No Description 2GN 2GP 2GR U425 Seiting the target Description The value that is indicated on the back of the chart to be used for adjustment should be entered Purpose Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N CCD CIS Entering the target values for scanner automatic adjustment Entering the target values for DP automatic adjustment 302FZ56990 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 Setting CCD 1 Select the item to be set Display Description N875 N475 N125 CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW RED GREEN Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch
86. y z an 1 a i ov ov O oN tyt e i sv sv aD z sts 2 ren yt i e104 lt ano sfs a A r gt z Hz 1 bY HAAZ d ONO a D oO a HS aves b ov lev m nE r o a ars HETH 1 fo av ev ele gt O sis r H gt i 5 GAS s 2 ONO L Ww LW D GAS py pa AGUS s a Onei a Aa AGUA Et lov lea aS o o ziz sv ba S ETs oo HH we eE oi Q rr ev lea X10530 ete S a s s ev wa j 9829 Fete 2 aio aE oasid oO aoo er KK p Mca 7 S 138 tj Zz O gt S fejer Q 1 Z 1 o Q Llale tlzlely Q ELI TTT at S Ween I ele gt U2 21 tanoa zizu 5 lt 9felr QO a ajalera E 1 CO sS wo wi ay WEIN 1 ax S n i E E 1 q EEEE wlofole clofols Eg S Feed 1 oo daadad a O _J SIXISEIE EIS gt EE 1 T z fol Fed ERIR S a6 9 E RARR z FN GND 2 D 5 ve aT N t z N O Ei ZT W T gt tut afe ia oO 7 MSMd a i z A ul 5 Laps gt els v LA 1 zi z 9 a uw 1 v A oO H rd 5 ty ote D a to fojaj Lind bl bel ba lt x 2 TEMSMd 2z O Gd tofe Joo Jou z Da foal bad a 5 ste OF MSMd Ae Bg O OTN a rs I UANZE a ale 2 5 o GND 6 As j 2N MSMd ale Jaleel l lelelelelelele O i 5 5 efe emsa LOH z ake gt gt gt 2 2 gt gt gt 2 g o tte lu aE REEI EREEREER 5 a 5 ze rs a E ttt E x N cal on mSMd ww acon ofio foo caf lalol eJe Je o aln ofol sola Z UIAF EEE annvet ste B bal bl hl a a oO Osan 28 28 wanve lt ofalrfofolefolaf al
87. 0 using the numeric keys and press the start key 2 Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items 3 Press the stop key Exit maintenance mode 1 Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key The machine exits the maintenance mode Print out the user setting list 1 Select Report Print to output the user various setting reports Make test copies 1 Place an original and make test copies Attaching the language label 230 V specifications only 1 According to need attach the correspond language label Completion of the machine installation 1 2 9 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows Maintenance item No Contents Factory setting U253 U260 U285 U326 U328 U342 U343 1 2 10 Switching between double and single counts Selecting the timing for copy counting Setting service status page Setting the black line cleaning indication Side ejection setting Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Double count After ejection ON ON OFF ON 1 2 3 Installing the key counter option Key counter installation requires the following parts Key counter P N 82142540 Key counter set P N 302A369705 Supplied parts of key counter set Key counter cover P N 2A360010
88. 00 DP communication problem System error service call partial operation Table 1 4 1 Partial operation control If any of the following calls for service is detected partial operation control will be activated After taking measures against the cause of trouble run maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control Contents Copy counts problem Machine number mismatch error 1 4 22 2 Self diagnostic codes Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Fax control PWB system problem optional fax Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Main PWB type mismatch error Defective PWB Contact the Service Administrative Division Fax control PWB incompatibility detection problem optional fax Fax software is not compatible with main software FAX and the machine are not compatible Use the FAX control PWB that is designed for use with the machine Backup memory EEPROM device problem Main PWB Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory EEPROM data problem Main PWB Reading data from EEPROM is abnor mal Da
89. 1 Seta specified original P N 2AC68241 in the DP 2 Select INPUT Display Description INPUT Automatic adjustment of first page using the DP for original size magnifica tion leading edge timing center line 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Method DP FACE DOWN 1 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description NORMAL TARGET Uses the value determined using maintenance item U425 as the tar get data ORIGINAL TARGET Uses the specified original for acquiring data as the target data Method NORMAL TREGET 1 Select the item Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N ALL Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 303JX57010 for original size magnification leading edge timing 303JX57020 center line input gamma chromatic aberration filter MTF filter and matrix Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 for original size magnificatio
90. 11 7 1 0 1 Figure 2 3 4 Engine PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC1 Connected to the power source PWB CFM3 4 ZCROSS 5VD FH M ON FH S ON GND 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 5VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC CFM3 4 On Off Zero cross signal 5 V DC power input FH M On Off FH S On Off Ground Connected to the power source PWB 24VDR GND GND GND 3 3V 5VD 24VDR 24V DC 3 3 V DC 5V DC 24V DC 24 V DC power input Ground Ground Ground 3 3 V DC power input 5 V DC power input 24 V DC power input Connected to the optional document finisher MY N oA RAOUN AHF TO FR WD SET SIG DFSDO DFSDI DFSCLK DFSEL SISEL DFRDY SIRDY 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Document finisher connection signal Document finisher serial communication data sig nal Document finisher serial communication data sig nal Document finisher CLOCK signal Document finisher SELECT signal Not used Document finisher READY signal Not used Connected to the optional paper feeder ON DOA fF OUN H 0 N DO Ff GND 5VD PFSEL PFSCLK PFSDI PFSDO PFRDY PFFEED 5VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Ground 5 V DC power output Paper feeder SELECT signal Paper feeder CLOCK signal Paper feeder serial communicati
91. 2 RAM size Total RAM size Local time zone Report output date Day Month Year hour minutes NTP server name FRPO setting 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U000 Service status page 2 Service Status Page MFP Firmware version 2GN_2000 XLG 368 2006 04 17 Engine Information Counter 10 Engine ROM Version 2GW_1000 003 001 31 Printed 11 Front Panel ROM Version 2GW_A000 001 019 Total Printed Pages 631 12 NVRAM Version _Bb04B29_Bb04B29 Copier 11 13 Scanner Version 2GW_1200 001 088 Printer 620 14 FAX Slott FAX 0 FAX BOOT Version 3KH_5000 001 001 32 Scanned FAX APL Version 3KH_5100 001 001 Total Scanned Pages 1 FAX IPL Version 3KH_5200 001 001 Copier 0 15 Serial No AFZ3123456 Other 1 16 MAC Address 00 C0 EE D0 01 0D 33 Paper Size A3 69 Toner Coverage fv 539 17 Period 07 11 05 07 12 05 09 05 R 0 18 Usage Page A4 Letter Conversion 3043 50 B4 0 19 Average Be 36 Total 2 90 0 Copy 3 56 Ledger 7 Printer 2 87 Folio 0 FAX 3 52 ieee 0 o etter 0 20 Last Page 2 80 Seaman 5 Other 0 Installed Options 21 Document Processor Installed 34 FAX Infomation 22 Paper Feeder Cassette Rings Normal 3 23 Finisher 3000 Finisher Rings FAX TEL 3 Mail Box Not Installed Rings TAD 3 24 Job Separator Installed TX SPEED V 29 9600bps 25 Memory Card Not Installed RX SPEED 9600bps 26 PDF Expansion Kit Installed ECM TX ON 27 Fax
92. 22 ms ified time of paper entry sensor PES turning off The reverse sensor REVS is not turned off within speci fied time its turning on Depends on paper size 94 Paper entry sensor stay remaining jam document finisher only The paper entry sensor PES is not turned off within specified time its turning on Depends on paper size 95 Paper conveying sen sor jam document fin isher only The paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn on 735 ms within specified time of reverse sensor REVS turning on The paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn off 1004 ms within specified time of reverse sensor REVS turning off 96 Jam between the built in finisher and machine built in finisher only Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the doc ument finisher within specified time of the intermediate tray sensor ITS turning on 1573 ms 30 ppm 1217 ms 40 50 ppm 1 4 10 3 Paper misfeeds Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 1 A paper jam in the paper feed convey ing or eject section is indicated as soon as the main power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch eject switch or feedshift switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace th
93. 2GP 2GR 4 Adjusting the position of the ISU reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral square ness not obtained Caution Adjust the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller first see page 1 3 20 Check for the longitudinal square ness of the copy image and if it is not obtained perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment Before making the following adjustment output a VTC PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment Procedure E Original Copy Copy Place the original example 1 example 2 on the platen Figure 1 5 40 Retigh h Press the start key and make Ea Ea screws and a test copy at 100 magnification Remove the platen Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame For copy example 1 move the frame in the direction of the white arrow lt gt For copy example 2 move the frame in the direction of the black arrow m Is the image correct End Mirror 2 frame Figure 1 5 41 1 5 20 2GN 2GP 2GR 5 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be replaced Procedure 1 Remove the developing unit and drum unit see pages 1 5 24 and 26 2 Remove the right lower cover and front left cover see pages 1 5 4 and 13 3 Rem
94. 4 Lower paper length switch PLSW L 30 Vertical paper conveying guide 1 15 Cassette lift 31 Vertical paper conveying guide 2 16 Right registration roller 2 1 1 2GN 2GP 2GR The MP tray can be hold up to 200 sheets of paper at one time Paper is fed from the MP tray by the rotation of the MP for warding pulley and MP paper feed pulley Also during paper feed the MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter Figure 2 1 2 Paper feed from the MP tray MP tray MP lift guide MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pulley MP feed pulley MP feed roller 1 MP feed pulley BSIYDSGESHVS 9 MP feed roller 2 10 MP paper switch MPPSW 11 MP feed switch MPFSW 12 MP paper length switch MPPLSW 13 MP paper width switch MPPWSW QO MA a FSW1 Grou PSW U LICSW U ie FSW2 rex PSW L LICSW L FSW3 n 2GN 2GP 2GR EPWB YC14 B6 YC10 A2 YC11 14 YC11 17 YC13 B9 YC13 B12 YC14 B1 YC13 A12 YC13 B15 YC13 B18 YC14 B4 YC13 A5 YC13 A2 YC13 A7 Figure 2 1 3 Paper feed section block diagram cassettes 1 and 2 A ob O a OT mPPsw Figure 2 1 4 Paper feed section block
95. 5 22 Feed roller 3 ROLLER C FEED 302BL06091 2BL06091 5 23 Registration switch SWITCH REGISTRATION 2FG27110 5 46 Left registration cleaner UNDER CLEANER REGIST 2BL07950 7 15 Registration guide GUIDE REGIST F 2BL16130 7 22 Right registration cleaner PARTS REGISTRATION CLEAN 2BL93450 a 5 44 Laser scanner unit LK 710 302GR93090 2GR93090 13 1 Platen PARTS CONTACT GLASS M ASSY 302GR93310 2GR93310 10 1 Platen PARTS CONTACT GLASS I ASSY 302GR93320 2GR93320 10 1 Slit glass PARTS CONTACT GLASS DP ASSY 302GR94380 2GR94380 10 2 Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2FB12140 9 25 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 MIRROR B 302GR17280 2GR17280 9 17 Reflector REFLECTOR SCANNER 302GR17250 2GR17250 9 27 Exposure lamp PARTS LAMP SCANNER SP 302GR94330 2GR94330 9 32 Original size detection switch SENSOR ORIGINAL 20927090 a 9 44 Transfer roller unit TR 710 302GR93280 2GR93280 7 A02 Developing unit DV 715 302GR93030 2GR93030 14 1 Drum unit DK 715 30 ppm 302GN93010 2GN93010 16 A01 Drum unit DK 716 40 50 ppm 302GR93040 2GR93040 16 A01 Main charger unit MC 710 302GR93070 2GR93070 16 13 Drum separation claw PARTS CLAW SEPARATION ASSY 302GR93190 2GR93190 16 14 Fuser unit FK 715 U 302GR93050 2GR93050 15 A01 Fuser unit FK 715 E 302GR93060 2GR93060 15 A01 Heat roller PARTS ROLLER HEAT SP 302GR94270 2GR94270 15 32 Heat roller separation claw CLAW HEAT ROLLER 2BL20080 15 1 Press roller PARTS ROLLER PRESS SP 302GR94280 2GR94280 15 A02 Press roller separation
96. 50 8987 FAX 972 252 9786 National Operation Center amp National Training Center 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 659 0055 FAX 972 570 5816 Latin America Division 8240 N W 52nd Terrace Dawson Building Suite 108 Miami Florida 33166 TEL 305 421 6640 FAX 305 421 6666 Printed in U S A
97. 51 7 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in 3000 sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section Jam code 15 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen sor 3 With 5 V DC present at CN6 12 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN6 11 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 3 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sensor 3 Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 8 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in 3000 sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section Jam code 16 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen sor 2 With 5 V DC present at CN6 9 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN6 8 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 2 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sensor 2 Check if paper feeder paper fe
98. B ACCOUNTING Restores the job accounting data stored in the data backup kit CF to the hard disk Method Initialization of CF 1 Select INITIALIZE CF 2 Press the start key CF is initialized 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Method Printing the fax image 1 Select FAX IMAGE 2 Press EXECUTE 3 Press the start key The fax reception data is printed out Method Restoration of data of the hard disk 1 Select JOB ACCOUNTING 2 Press the start key The job accounting data is restored Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Relay board maintenance Description Sets the machine status temporarily when call for service C0060 occurs However after the setting call for service C0060 occurs again when progress of period Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description MODE 0 Setting mode OFF MODE 1 Setting mode ON Usable up to three times of use Initial setting MODE 0 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Supplement After removing the cause of the problem be sure to change the setting in OFF 1 3 79 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U942 Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the amount of slack generated when the optional DP is used Purpose Use this mode if an original non fe
99. B or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Document finisher communication problem optional 3000 sheet docu ment finisher No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a communica tion error parity or checksum error is detected five times in succession Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the finisher main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem optional 3000 sheet document fin isher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem optional punch unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the punch PWB and the connector YC4 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective punch PWB
100. Backup Kit Not Installed ECM RX OFF 28 Security Kit Installed V 34 TX 29 Data Security Kit C Software REG G3 TX EQR 4db 30 Security Library Version 0 50 REG G3 RX EQR Odb RX MODEM LEVEL 43dBm SGL LVL MODEM 9dBm 35 1 1 36 500 530 37 0 0 0 0 38 97 0 39 F00 U00 40 0A001300 FOA8EF98 000000000000 000000000000 020A1 Bt 41 1234 1234 0001234abcd567800001234abcd5678 01 2345678901 23456789012345678901 08 00 07 42 0000000000 F80C001A37 302A183C00 000100013D 8791BFC305 0000003100 000F5D0000 01 FD000000 0000000FB7 0000000000 0000260000 0000000000 0000000000 0000008400 0000000000 011 F000F51 8FOF Figure 1 3 3 1 3 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U000 1 3 10 Detail of Service status page Description Supplement Engine ROM version Operation panel ROM version NV RAM version _ Bb 04B29 _ Bb 04B29 a c d e f a Consistency of the present software version and the database _ underscore OK Asterisk NG b Database version c The oldest time stamp of database version d Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmware version _ underscore OK Asterisk NG e ME firmware version f The oldest time stamp of the ME database version Normal if a and d are underscored and b and e are identical with c and f Scanner version Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the optional fa
101. CIS Clearing 1 Select the item to be cleared 2 Press the start key The accumulated time is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method Press the start key Display Description COPY SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for copying OTHERS SCAN CNT Scanner operation count except for copying Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 81 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U993 Outputting a VTC PG pattern Description Selects and outputs a VTC PG pattern created in the machine Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non scanned output VTC PG pattern Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the VTC PG pattern to be output Display PG pattern to be output Purpose PG1 Leading edge registration adjust ment Center line adjustment Margin adjustment Lateral squareness adjustment Magnification adjustment Driving unevenness of drum 3 Press the system menu key 4 Press the start key A VTC PG pattern is output 5 To return to the screen for selecting an
102. Centerfold side registration motor 1 problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1000 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold side registration motor 1 and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold side registra tion motor 1 Replace centerfold side registration motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Centerfold paper conveying belt motor problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 2500 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 YC7 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 2 and the continuity across the con nector terminals Repair or replace if neces sary Defective center fold paper convey ing belt motor 1 2 Replace centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 2 Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Blade motor problem optional cen terfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detect
103. D PWB CCDPWB Reads the image off originals 9 Main operation unit PWB OPWB M Controls touch panel and LCD indication 10 Right operation unit PWB OPWB R Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 11 Left operation unit PWB OPWB L Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 12 Upper operation unit PWB OPWB U Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 13 Front operation unit PWB OPWB P Consists of the display LEDs 14 LCD inverter PWB LINPWB ee Controls LCD indication 15 Laser diode PWB LDPWB eeeeee Generates and controls the laser light 2 2 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Switches and sensors 0200 251103 Ol ONS oO k k 12 13 14 15 Machine front VL Machine inside a Machine rear Figure 2 2 2 Switches and sensors Main power switch MSW Turns the AC power on and off Interlock switch ILSW eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Turns the AC power for the fuser heater on and off Safety switch 1 SSW1 Safety switch 2 SSW2 Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover 1 is opened Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened Upper paper switch PSW U eee Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 1 Lower paper switch PSW L eeeeeee Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 2 Upper lift limit switch LICSW U 0 Detects th
104. Description Setting range Initial setting MODE Separation charger mode 0 to 255 0 to 3 3 Entering a value other than 0 to 3 will engage the MODE3 value 3 separation mode Details on the modes Display Description MODEO Value 0 Full page separation for both first and second pages MODE1 Value 1 First page Separation on leading and trailing edges Second page Full page sepration MODE2 Value 2 Full page sepration is activated for both first and second pages provided the ambient temperature is less than 19 C 66 2 F First page Separation is activated for both leading and trailing edges sec ond page Full page separation provided the ambient temperature is more than 20 C 68 F MODES Value 3 Separation is activated on both leading and trailing edges for both first and second pages 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U117 Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number Purpose To check the drum number Method Press the start key The drum number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U118 Displaying the drum history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the drum
105. Ground Developing unit distinction signal 5 V DC power output TNS On Off Ground Developing unit detection signal Developing unit FUSE CUT signal Developing unit EEPROM DATA signal Developing unit EEPROM CLOCK signal 24 V DC power output TNFSOL On Off TCDSW On Off Ground Drum unit distinction signal Ground CL On Off Drum unit EEPROM DATA signal Drum unit EEPROM CLOCK signal Ground Drum unit detection signal 5 V DC power output MCCM On Off MCCM On Off Connected to the regis tration switch fuser unit duplex feed clutch duplex paper con veying switch and cooling fan motor 8 to 13 2 3 8 GND RSW 5VD FUSER PO 3VD FTH1 FUSE CUT GND GND FTH2 STD FTH2 24VDR DUPFCL GND DUPPCSW 5VD GND 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 3 3 V DC 0to5VDC 0 5 V DC 0to5VDC 0to5VDC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC Ground RSW On Off 5 V DC power output Fuser unit distinction signal 3 3 V DC power output FTH1 detection voltage signal FTH1 FUSE CUT signal Ground Ground FTH2 detection voltage signal FTH2 detection voltage signal 24 V DC power output DUPFCL On Off Ground DUPPCSW On Off 5 V DC power output Ground Connector Signal Voltage 2GN 2GP 2GR Description YC10 Connected to the regis tration switch fuser unit duplex feed clutch duplex paper con veying switch and cooling fan motor 8 to 13 CFM11 12 13 DUP PO 24VDR CFM8 9
106. Ground Ground 3 3 V DC power output 5 V DC power output 24 V DC power output Connected to the engine PWB GND FH S ON FH M ON 5VD ZCROSS CFM3 4 0 5 V DC 5VDC 5VDC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC Ground FH S On Off FH M On Off 5 V DC power output Zero cross signal CFM3 4 On Off Connected to the optional document finisher SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground YC4 Connected to the cool ing fan motor 3 4 MN A Oo a A O N HOT FR OON HIN DOT PR O N CFM3 4 24VD DCOV 24V 24V DC CFM3 4 On Off 24 V DC power output YC5 Connected to the fuser heater M S 2 3 2 FH M ON FH S ON FH LIVE 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC FH M On Off FH S On Off AC power output 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Voltage YC6 Connected to the scan ner PWB Description 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 24 V DC 24 V DC power output 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 12 V DC power output ON Oa FWD Kae 5 V DC power output oo 3 3 V DC power output Connected to the optional cassette heater Connected to the optional paper feeder optional document finisher and hard disk Connected to the main operation PWB 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 Oo LIVE NEUTRAL 120 VAC
107. IN P 1 3 67 U404 For copying originals from the DP B MARGIN BACK Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 D MARGIN Test chart P 1 3 66 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment the platen a5 U404 D MARGIN P 1 3 67 U404 For copying originals from the DP D MARGIN BACK Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data U403 A MARGIN Test chart P 1 3 66 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment C MARGIN the platen U404 AMARGIN P 1 3 67 U404 For copying originals from the DP ig A MARGIN BACk C MARGIN C MARGIN BACKk When maintenance item U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically is run using the specified original P N 302FZ56990 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the scanner magnification U065 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration U066 Adjusting the scanner center line U067 When maintenance item U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically is run using the specified original P N 2AC68241 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the DP magnification U070 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U071 Adjusting the DP center line U072 Image quality Item Specifications 100 magnification Enlargement reduction Lateral squareness Leading edge registration Skewed paper feed L
108. Key counter connection signal 24 V DC power output Key counter signal Ground Connection signal 2 3 11 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 Connected to the optional built in fin isher 24VDR 24VDR GND GND 5VD GND SELECT READY SDI SDO SCLK NC 24V DC 24V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output Ground Ground 5 V DC power output Ground Built in finisher SELECT signal Built in finisher READY signal Built in finisher serial communication data signal Built in finisher serial communication data signal Built in finisher CLOCK signal Not used Connected to the optional job separator OMANOAARWND HAH ASLAN DOA BRWOD JBESW 5VD GND GND SET SIG GND EPDSW 5VD LED REM 5VD LED FSSOL2 FSSOL1 24VDR 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC JBESW On Off 5 V DC power output Ground Ground Job separator connection signal Ground EPDSW On Off 5 V DC power output LED On Off 5 V DC power output FSSOL On Off return FSSOL On Off activate 24 V DC power output Connected to the main PWB 2 3 12 4 4 oO AN DOA FWY Se ee Cm NE a A O N SCKN EGSI EGSO SBSY SDIR EGIRN OUTPEN PVSYNC 5VD SGND SGND LDON PRST PMD HLDENG O 00000 OO0O000 0 O 0 5 V DC
109. N2 7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper feeder feed switch Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 Check see service manual of paper feeder 1 4 12 Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 6 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from MP tray Jam code 14 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the MP paper feed pulley MP forwarding pulley and MP separation pulley are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective MP feed switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn MP feed switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the MP paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select MP paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the MP paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4
110. P FINISHER Counts of optional finisher DP Display Description ADP No of single sided originals that has passed through the DP RADP No of double sided originals that has passed through the DP Finisher Display Description CP CNT No of copies that has passed STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated STACK Frequency the stacker has been activated SADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated Clearing 1 Select the item to be cleared To clear the counts for all press the clear key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the casettes or other sections and the related parts are serviced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key to reset partial operation control The maintenance mode is exited and the machine returns to the same status as when the main power switch is turned on Checking the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value Purpose To check the total counter value Method Press the start key The screen for total count value is displayed Completion
111. Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper conveying belt home position sen sor 2 Replace paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 Defective paper conveying belt motor 2 Replace paper conveying belt motor 2 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 34 Internal tray communication error optional 3000 sheet document fin isher Communication with the internal tray is not possible although the connection is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the finisher main PWB and the connector YC1 on the internal tray PWB and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Main tray problem optional 3000 sheet document finisher The main tray is not detected by the main tray top limit detection sensor or the main tray capacity detection sensor within 20s since the tray has started ascending The main tray upper limit detection sen sor or the main tray load detection sen sor is not detected to be turned off in 20 seconds after the main tray has descended The main tray low limit detection sensor is not detected to be turned on in 20 s
112. SSW turn ing off 2051 ms 30 ppm 1587 ms 40 50 ppm The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing on 2051 ms 30 ppm 1587 ms 40 50 ppm 1 4 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Feedshift 52 The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 1545 ms 30 ppm section Misfeed in feedshift specified time of the start of eject motor EM reverse 1196 ms 40 50 ppm section rotation During paper switchback operation the feedshift switch 2989 ms 30 ppm FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its 2313 ms 40 50 ppm turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within 2899 ms 30 ppm specified time of the registration switch RSW turning off 2243 ms 40 50 ppm The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within 2899 ms 30 ppm specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2243 ms 40 50 ppm Duplex 60 The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does 2837 ms 30 ppm section Duplex paper convey not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch 2196 ms 40 50 ppm ing section 1 FSSW turning on The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does 2837 ms 30 ppm not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch 2196 ms 40 50 ppm FSSW turning off 61 The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within spe
113. STATUS Outputs the service status page 3 Press the start key The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output When A4 Letter paper is available a report of this size is output If not specify the paper feed location When output is complete the screen for selecting an item is displayed Event log Event Log MFP Firmware version 2GN_2000 001 036 2006 04 17 1 2 3 Paper Jam Log 4 Service Call Log Count Event Count Service Code 9876543 666554 02 11 42 02 02 4988 02 11 43 01 09 4988 02 11 44 02 11 4988 4988 02 11 41 01 01 1103 a b c d e 1103 Tooo 1103 02 11 41 01 01 1103 02 11 42 02 02 1027 02 11 43 01 09 5 Maintenance Log 1027 02 11 44 02 11 Count 1027 02 11 45 03 91 8 9045571 1027 02 01 F0 01 01 704511 550 01 01 01 01 01 7045 28 01 09 01 01 01 3454 3454 3454 417 35 7881214 F0 0030 578944 01 0100 5296 F0 4000 5295 F0 3010 2099 01 2100 1054 01 2100 809 01 2120 30 01 2100 NUA ODN OO NURON 6 Counter Log f J01 000 J19 000 J61 002 g C0101 001 C2223 001 C3502 001 J02 000 J20 000 J62 000 C0102 001 C2225 001 C3503 001 J21 000 J63 000 C0107 001 C2228 001 C3552 001 J22 000 J64 000 C0108 001 C2259 001 C3553 001 J23 002 C0220 004 C3003 001 lt 2002 001 C3411 001 J16 000 C2030 001 C3412 001 J17 000 J53 000 C2031 001 C3421 001 J18 000 J36 000 J54 000 C2222 001 C3431 001 Figure 1 3 1 Maintenance item No Description
114. SW U WIDTH HP SWL FEED IN SW PAPER DET SW TRAY PAP DET SW EJECT SW TRAY DET SW Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 1 CPCBS1 Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 2 CPCBS2 Blade home position sensor BLHPS Centerfold side registration sensor 2 CSRS2 Centerfold side registration sensor 1 CSRS1 Centerfold paper entry sensor CPES Centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS Tray paper detection sensor TPDS Centerfold eject switch CESW Centerfold top cover switch CTCSW Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 52 Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors in the optional DP on Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Motors DP FEED MOTOR DP REG MOTOR DP CONV MOTOR DP LIFT MOTOR CIS FAN MOTOR DP FEED MOT REV Original feed motor OFM is turned on Original registration motor ORM is turned on Original conveying motor OCM is turned on DP lift motor DPLM is turned on DP fan motor 1 2 3 DPFM1 2 3 is turned on Original feed motor OFM is turned on reversing 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key when operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Mainte
115. StOM cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Charge erasing system 0005 Cleaning system eeeeeeeeeees Scanning System eeeeeeeeeeeee Light SOUICE ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeees DIMENSIONS cceeseeeeeeestteeeeeeees POWEY SOUICE sesseseeeeeeeeeeeeees ODTIONS ETETA TETEA Printer functions Printing speed First print time eee Resolution eseceeeseeeeteeeeeseeeeees Applicable OS eceeeeeseeeeeeees INTEACES oop EE A chee dae 1 999 sheets a Si drum diameter 40 mm Single positive corona charging Semiconductor laser Dry reverse developing single component system Developer 1 component magnetism toner Toner replenishing automatic from a toner container Transfer roller Separation electrode Heat roller Heat source halogen heaters Abnormally high temperature protection devices thermostats Exposure by cleaning lamp Cleaning blade and roller Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Standard 512 MB Maximum 1024 MB 40 GB 600 x 600 dpi Inert gas lamp 599 W x 646 D x 745 H mm 23 9 16 W x 25 7 16 D x 29 5 16 H Approx 85 kg 187 lbs 1497 W x 646 D mm 58 15 16 W x 25 7 16 D Original size Paper selection Mixed sized originals Original orientation Collate Off set mode Staple Punch mode Output destination Zoom mode Combine mode Mar gin Centering mode Border erase Booklet from sheets Duplex Cover mode Form
116. WB and check for correct operation DP lift motor going up error optional DP The pulse count raised to 10000 at lift ing however the DP lift switch could not be turned on After one time retry the DP lift limit switch could not be turned on Loose connection of the DP lift motor connector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Malfunction of the DP lift motor Replace the DP lift motor and check for cor rect operation Malfunction of the DP lift upper limit switch Replace the DP lift upper limit switch and check for correct operation Loose connection of the DP lift upper limit switch con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation DP lift motor going down error optional DP The pulse count lowered to 10000 at lift ing down however the DP bottom limit switch could not be turned on After one time retry the DP bottom limit switch could not be turned on Loose connection of the DP lift motor connector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Malfunction of the DP lift motor Replace the DP lift motor and check for cor rect operation Malf
117. X KYOCERA KM 3050 KM 4050 KM 5050 SERVICE Published in Jul 06 2GN70760 CAUTION DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER S INSTRUCTIONS ATTENTION IL Y A DANGER D EXPLOSION S IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MEME TYPE OU D UN TYPE REC OMMANDE PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES USAGEES CON FORMEMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT Revision history This page is intentionally left blank Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property These symbols are described below DANGER High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol AAWARNING Serious bodily injury or death may result from insuffic
118. ad Defective flash ROM Replace the flash ROM and check for cor rect operation Fax control PWB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 43 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 4 3 1 No image appears entirely white See page 1 4 45 6 A black line appears longitudi nally See page 1 4 47 11 The leading edge of the image is con sistently misaligned with the original See page 1 4 48 16 Fusing is poor See page 1 4 49 1 4 44 2 No image appears entirely black Image formation problems 5 A white line appears longitudi nally 4 Background is visible 3 lmage is too light See page 1 4 46 See page 1 4 46 See page 1 4 46 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other See page 1 4 45 7 A black line appears laterally 9 Black dots appear 10 Image is blurred on the image See page 1 4 47 See page 1 4 48 14 Offset occurs See page 1 4 47 See page 1 4 47 12 The leading edge of the image is spo radically misaligned with the original 15 lmage is partly missing 13 Paper creases See page 1 4 48 See page 1 4 48 See page 1 4 49 See page 1 4 49 19 Ilmage is not
119. ansienseeion The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 1652 ms 30 ppm specified time of the feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on 1278 ms 40 50 ppm Fuser 40 The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified 2899 ms 30 ppm section Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2243 ms 40 50 ppm MP way The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 2899 ms 30 ppm Misteedintussr section specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2243 ms 40 50 ppm cassette 1 42 Misfeed in fuser section cassette 2 43 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 3 44 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 4 45 Misfeed in fuser section optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 46 Misfeed in fuser section duplex section Eject 50 The eject switch ESW does not turn off within specified 2899 ms 30 ppm section Misfeed in eject section time of the registration switch RSW turning off 2243 ms 40 50 ppm The eject switch ESW does not turn off within specified 2899 ms 30 ppm time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2243 ms 40 50 ppm 51 The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn on 2051 ms 30 ppm Misfeed in job separa within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn 1587 ms 40 50 ppm tor eject section ing on The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch F
120. ation This item is printed only when the optional fax kit is installed Destination information Area informa tion Printable area setting Offset for each bin MP tray top MP tray left Cassette 2 top Cassette 2 left Margin setting System top System left Panel lock information USB information Panel lock 0 OFF 1 Partial lock 2 Full lock USB 0 Not installed 1 Full speed 2 Hi speed Engine information RFID information Maintenance information Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode Purpose To exit the maintenance mode Method Press the start key The normal copy mode is entered Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport position in which the frame can be fixed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press MODE1 ALL on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport 4 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an intialization error Refer to the table of the error codes on P 1 3 14 When ERROR 09 occurred turn main power switch off then on format the ha
121. ation Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the platen when scanning from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Displays the cleaning guidance OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance COUNT Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the count value 1 Select COUNT 2 Enter a count using the or numeric keys Setting range 0 to 999 Initial setting 8 When setting is 0 the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected 3 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 62 Side ejection setting Description Sets whether to eject to the side of the machine when an optional curl eliminator is installed Purpose Set according to the preference of the user Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON To eject to the side of the machine OFF Not to eject to the side of the machine Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed
122. ayed U031 1 3 16 Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches FEED1 Feed switch 1 FSW1 FEED2 Feed switch 2 FSW2 FEED3 Feed switch 3 FSW3 MP TRAY MP feed switch MPFSW REGIST Registration switch RSW EJECT Eject switch ESW BRANCH Feedshift switch FSSW DUPLEX Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW JOB SEPARATOR Job separator eject switch JBESW Optional Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U032 Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch on Purpose To check the operation of each clutch Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the clutch to be operated 3 Press the start key The clutch turns on for 1 s Display Clutches PF1 Upper paper feed clutch PFCL U PF2 Lower paper feed clutch PFCL L PF MP TRAY MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL FEED1 Feed clutch 1 FCL1 FEED2 Feed clutch 2 FCL2 FEED3 Feed clutch 3 FCL3 FEED MP TRAY MP feed clutch MPFCL REGIST Registrat
123. be checked The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description FINISHER MOTOR Checking the motor of the 3000 sheet document finisher FINISHER SOL Checking the solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher MAIL BOX Checking the motor and solenoid of the mail box BOOKLET Checking the motor of the centerfold unit Method Checking the motor of the 3000 sheet document finisher 1 Select the item to be operated The operation starts Display Motor FEED IN MOTOR M FEED IN MOTOR L CONV MOTOR H CONV MOTOR M CONV MOTOR L EJECT MOTOR H EJECT MOTOR M EJECT MOTOR L SUB PATH MOTOR H SUB PATH MOTOR M BUNDLE UP MOTOR BUNDLE DOWN MTR WIDTH TEST A3 WIDTH TEST LD STAPLE FR MOTOR STAPLE S MOTOR STAPLE MOTOR TRAY MOTOR PUNCH MOTOR PUDDLE MOTOR Paper entry motor PEM is turned on counterwise Paper entry motor PEM is turned on clockwise Paper conveying motor is turned on at high speed Paper conveying motor is turned on at middle speed Paper conveying motor is turned on at low speed Eject motor EJM is turned on at high speed Eject motor EJM is turned on at middle speed Eject motor EJM is turned on at low speed Relief path motor RPM is turned on counterwise Relief path motor RPM is turned on clockwise Paper conveying belt motor 1 PCBM1 is turned on Paper conveying belt motor 2 PCBM2 is turned on Side registration motor 1 2 SRM1 2 is turned on Side registration mot
124. c Asia Pacific specifications 3 Press the start key All data in the backup RAM is initialized 4 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an intialization error When ERROR 09 occurred turn main power switch off then on format the hard disk using maintenance item U024 and execute initialization using maintenance item U020 For other errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U020 Error codes Codes Description ERROR 01 Configuration initialization error ERROR 02 Counter initialization error ERROR 03 One touch initialization error ERROR 04 Panel program initialization error ERROR 05 Event log initialization error ERROR 06 Account initialization error ERROR 07 Address book initialization error ERROR 08 Department initialization error ERROR 09 Document box initialization error ERROR 0a Permissibility initialization error ERROR 0b Job log initialization error ERROR 20 Engine initialization error ERROR 40 Scanner initialization error Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U021 Initializing counters and mode settings Description Initializes all settings except those pertinent to the type of copier namely each counter service call history and mode setting Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination Ref
125. cceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 2 2 Detaching and refitting the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys 1 5 4 3 Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteatenes 1 5 9 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 3 Optical section nra eeaeee eee eee sie divs even eile 1 5 11 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure AMP eee eeeeeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeaeeeetaeeeseeeees 1 5 11 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner Wires eee cc eeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeesenaeeeeeneeeeeaneesenneeesnaeeees 1 5 13 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference eeeeeseeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseaeeteeeeneetees 1 5 18 4 Adjusting the position of the ISU reference eeeeceesceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneeeeaeeeeeeteaeesieeenaeeneend 1 5 20 5 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner Unit eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeetenaeeeeeneeeeseneeseneetensaeeeees 1 5 21 6 Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit reference cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeesenneeeees 1 5 23 W25 4 Druin SOCOM 3 coec esate eteetee theese ateca cade cacedhcestes ag vacdensalsspesceahateley a aaa a e aaa AA a aade a aaea a a 1 5 24 1 Detaching and refitting the drum Unit cece eeeeeee cence eeeeaeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeaaeeeesaeeeseeeeeeaaeeseneeeeneeeees 1 5 24 2 Detaching and refitting the main Charger Unit eee eeeseeeeeeneeeese
126. ci 1994 ms 30 ppm Duplex paper convey fied time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUP 1543 ms 40 50 ppm ing section 2 PCSW turning on The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci 1994 ms 30 ppm fied time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUP 1543 ms 40 50 ppm PCSW turning off Optional 70 The original feed switch OFSW does not turn on within 2436 pulse DP No original feed specified time during the first sheet feeding The original feed switch OFSW does not turn on within 4430 pulse specified time during the second sheet feeding 71 DP timing switch 2 DPTSW2 does not turn off within 2500 pulse An original jam in the specified time original feed conveying section 1 72 The original feed switch OFSW and original registration 16675 pulse An original jam in the switch ORSW does not turn off within specified time original feed conveying section 2 73 DP timing switch 1 DPTSW1 does not turn off within 4979 pulse An original jam in the specified time original conveying sec tion 74 The original registration switch ORSW does not turn on 4979 pulse An original jam in the original registration section within specified time and after 5 retries 1 4 6 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional 75 The original registration switch ORSW does not turn off 19533 pulse DP An original jam in the within specified time inal teat e r
127. ck if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter see page 1 5 26 Dirty shading plate Clean the shading plate 6 A black line appears longitudinally Causes Copy example 2GN 2GP 2GR Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty scanner mirror Clean the scanner mirror Dirty main charger wire 7 A black line appears laterally Copy example Causes Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 25 Check procedures corrective measures Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty developing section Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid Leaking separation electrode 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other Copy example Causes Clean the separation electrode Check procedures corrective measures Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 25 Defective exposure lamp 9 Black dots appear
128. ck the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the Check see page 1 4 51 registration clutch 19 Broken feedshift switch or Check visually and replace switch A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copying jam in optional job separator eject sec job separator eject switch actuator Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse el code 51 Feedshift switch job separator eject switch 20 Check if the feedshift sole Run maintenance item U033 and select the feedshift solenoid on A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying jam in feed shift section Jam code 52 1 4 16 noid malfunctions the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the feedshift solenoid Check see page 1 4 51 Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch registration switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turne
129. cking the switch of the mail box Checking the switch of the centerfold unit Method Checking the switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status 1 When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches FRONT COVER SW TOP COVER SW RIGHT COVER SW SET SW BOOKLET SW PUNCH TANK SW TRAY L LIMIT SW TRAY U LIMIT SW TRAY MIDDLE SW PAP HOLD DOWN SW LOAD DET SW FEED IN SW EJECT SW 1 EJECT SW 2 EJECT SW 3 STAPLE HP SW 1 STAPLE HP SW 2 MIDDLE FEED SW1 MIDDLE FEED SWe2 BUNDLE DET SW 1 BUNDLE DET SW 2 BUNDLE UP HP SW BNDL DOWN HP SW WIDTH HP SW 1 WIDTH HP SW 2 BUNDLE INTERF SW VCARRY SW Front cover switch FCSW Top cover switch TCSW Sub tray right switch STRSW Joint switch JSW Centerfold set switch CSSW Punch waste box sensor PWBS Main tray lower limit detection sensor MTLLDS Main tray upper limit detection sensor MTULDS Main tray middle position detection sensor MTMPDS Paper holder home position sensor PHHPS Main tray load detection sensor MTLDS Paper entry sensor PES Eject switch 1 ESW1 Eject switch 2 ESW2 Eject switch 3 ESW3 Staple home position switch 1 STHPSW1 Staple home position switch 2 STHPSW2 Internal tray paper entry sensor 1 ITPES1 Internal tray paper entry sensor 2 ITPES2 Paper detection sensor 1 PDS1 Pape
130. cleaning indication ON 8 1 2 Side ejection setting OFF Setting the size conversion factor 1 072 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Setting the ejection restriction ONT Switching between duplex simplex copy mode OFF Setting the value for maintenance due indication Image processing Adjusting margins of image printing 74 70 68 85 140 55 1 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing 07 Adjusting the scanner automatically Setting the target Network scanner Setting the enterprise mode Inch specifications ON 1 2 Metric specifications OFF 1 2 Others Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Checking clearing the punch hole scrap counter 35000 0 Checking clearing the paper jam counts Checking clearing the service call counts Checking clearing counts by optional devices Resetting partial operation control Checking the total counter value Clearing the black ratio data Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes Checking the copy counts Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Checking machine life counts Initial setting
131. ctive PWB Replace the scanner PWB or SHD PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory read write problem scanner PWB Read and write data does not match Defective backup RAM or scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem scan ner PWB Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values Problem with the backup memory data Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the backup memory data Defective scanner PWB If the C3910 is displayed after initializing the backup memory replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 30 Polygon motor synchronization prob lem The polygon motor does not reach the stable speed within 20 s of the START signal turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon motor Replace the laser scanner unit Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Polygon motor steady state problem The polygon motor rotation is not stable for 20 s after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized Poor contact in the connector t
132. d 5 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an intialization error Refer to the table of the error codes on P 1 3 14 When ERROR 09 occurred turn main power switch off then on format the hard disk using maintenance item U024 and execute initialization using maintenance item U022 For other errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U022 1 3 15 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U024 HDD formatting Description Formats the HDD backup data areas for the document management network scanner and department administration Purpose To initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD after shipping Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key to initialize the hard disk 4 Turn the main power switch off and on U030 Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor Purpose To check the operation of each motor Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the motor to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Operation FEED MAIN EJECT FW EJECT REV Paper feed motor operates Drive motor operates Eject motor rotates forward Eject motor rotates in reverse 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displ
133. d off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse MP feed switch registration switch 1 4 14 Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 13 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in paper feed section Jam code 21 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 or MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 MP feed switch Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective paper feeder feed switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN2 7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper feeder feed switch Check if the clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Upper paper feed clutch lower paper feed clutch MP paper con veying clutch Electrical problem with clutch Check see page 1 4 51 Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace
134. d on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 51 Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 21 A paper jam in the switchback section is indicated during copying jam in optional switchback Broken feedshift switch or switchback eject switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse unit Jam code 53 Defective switchback eject With 5 V DC present at CN5 2 on the switchback unit main PWB switch check if CN5 4 on the switchback unit main PWB remains low when the switchback eject switch is turned on and off If it does replace the switchback eject switch 22 Broken feedshift switch or Check visually and replace switch A paper jam in the duplex section is indi cated during copying jam in duplex paper conveying section 1 Jam code 60 duplex paper conveying switch actuator Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch duplex paper conveying switch 23 A paper jam in the dupl
135. developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole Then when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed On the other hand on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed When toner comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve Development is complete Magnetic toner blade South pole North pole Drum d Developing sleeve Figure 2 1 16 Single component developing system 2 1 12 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller separation electrode and drum separation claws A high voltage generated by the high voltage transformer PWB HVTPWB is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high voltage trans former PWB HVTPWB to the separation electrode Drum E separation claw Separation electrode Transfer roller
136. displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and opera tion stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items Method ORIGINAL TARGET 1 2 3 Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data P N 303JX57010 on the platen and press the start key Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data P N 303JX57010 on the platen and press the start key Select the item Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N ALL Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 303JX57010 for original size magnification leading edge timing 303JX57020 center line input gamma chromatic aberration filter MTF filter and matrix INPUT Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 for original size magnification leading edge timing center line GAMMA Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 303JX57010 for input gamma MTF MATRIX Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 303JX57020 for MTF filter and matrix ALL 1 2 Set specified originals P N 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 in the DP Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241 303JX57010 and 303JX57020 Press the start key Auto a
137. djustment starts INPUT 1 2 Set a specified original P N 2AC24681 in the DP Press the start key Auto adjustment starts GAMMA ils 2 Set a specified original P N 303JX57010 in the DP Press the start key Auto adjustment starts MTF MATRIX 1 2 Set a specified original P N 303JX57020 in the DP Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and opera tion stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items 1 3 71 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U411 Error Codes Codes Description ERROR 01 ERROR 02 ERROR 03 ERROR 04 ERROR 05 ERROR 06 ERROR 07 ERROR 08 ERROR 09 ERROR 0a ERROR 0b ERROR 0c ERROR 0d ERROR 0e ERROR Of ERROR 10 ERROR 11 ERROR 12 ERROR 13 ERROR 14 ERROR 15 ERROR 16 ERROR 17 ERROR 18 ERROR 19 ERROR 1a ERROR 1b ERROR 2X ERROR 3X ERROR 4X ERROR 5X ERROR 6X ERROR 7X ERROR 8X ERROR 9X ERROR aX ERROR bX ERROR cX ERROR dX ERROR eX ERROR fX ERROR ff Black band detection error scanner leading edge registration Black band detection error scanner center line Black band detection error scan
138. dure Detaching the scanner wires Clip hold 1 Remove the exposure lamp see page 1 5 NN ial 11 2 Remove the clip holder 3 Open the front cover and left cover 1 4 Remove four screws and remove front left cover Front left cover Figure 1 5 29 5 Remove the screw and pin and then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 5 30 1 5 13 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Remove two screws and remove the scan ner left cover 7 Remove each screw and then remove front and rear wire holder plates from mirror 1 frame 8 Remove the mirror 1 frame 9 Remove the round terminals from the scan ner wire springs on scanner unit left side 10 Remove the scanner wire 1 5 14 Scanner left cover Figure 1 5 31 Mirror 1 wee A SS GE Front wire holder plate Rear wire holder plate Figure 1 5 32 Scanner wire springs Round o Figure 1 5 33 2GN 2GP 2GR Fitting the scanner wires 11 Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in the fig Mirror 2 frame Frame securing too ure and insert two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the machine center to fix the mirror 2 frame in position Figure 1 5 34 1 5 15 2GN 2GP 2GR 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside of the scanner unit 1 Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from be
139. e Defective tray lower limit sensor push paper sensor surface view sen sor Replace the sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 35 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 36 Side registration motor 1 problem optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 s passed Jam 88 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC2 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on side registration motor 1 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective side reg istration motor 1 Replace side registration motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Adjustment motor problem optional document finisher When the adjustment motor is driving the ON status of the adjustment home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed When adjustment operation starts the ON status of the adjustment home posi tion sensor is not detected The adjustment motor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable
140. e keys Display Setting Setting range Initial setting LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330 WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 19 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U051 1 3 20 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Description Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly or if the copy paper is Z folded Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial range setting MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 0 CASSETTE Paper feed from cassette 30 to 20 0 DUPLEX Duplex mode second 30 to 20 0 MP TRAY THICK Paper feed from MP tray thick paper 30 to 20 0 Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value The greater the value the larger the amount of slack the smaller the value the smaller the amount of slack Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 6 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop
141. e Press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Remove Compact Flash or USB memory from the machine Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on Figure 1 6 1 1 6 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field High voltage PWB VR2 VR42 VR201 VR204 1 6 3 Remarks on main PWB replacement When replacing the main PWB remove EEPROM from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB EEPROM Main PWB Figure 1 6 2 1 6 4 Remarks on scanner PWB replacement When replacing the scanner PWB remove the EEPROM from the scanner PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new scanner PWB EEPROM Scanner PWB Figure 1 6 3 1 6 2 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 1 Paper feed section The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections Primary feed conveys paper from the cassettes 1 2 or MP tray to the left and right registration rollers at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing Each cassette consists of a li
142. e 2 Figure 1 3 16 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode 072 404 per G 3 67 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR tania Description U073 Checking scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions Purpose To check scanner operation Start 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated Display Description SCANNER MOTOR HOME POSITION DP READING DUST CHECK Scanner operation Home position operation DP scanning position operation Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on Setting SCANNER MOTOR 1 Select SCANNER MOTOR 2 Select the item 3 Change the setting using the keys Display Operating conditions Setting range ZOOM Magnification 25 to 400 SIZE Original size See below LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 off or 1 on Original sizes for each setting in SIZE Setting Paper size Setting Paper size 5000 A4 5000 A5R 4300 B5 7800 Folio 5100 11 x 8 1 2 10200 11 x 17 10000 A3 9000 11 x 15 8600 B4 8400 8 1 2 x 14 7100 A4R 6600 8 1 2 x 11 6100 B5R 5100 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 4 Press the start key Scanning starts under the selected conditions 5 To stop ope
143. e 3 decrease the value t tt Copy Copy Copy example 1 example2 example 3 Figure 1 3 15 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode u071 U404 pe Pa ooo Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 29 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U072 1 3 30 Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA1 Center line for the simplex copy mode 39 to 39 0 0 17 mm ADJUST DATA2 Center line for the duplex copy mode 39 to 39 0 0 17 mm ADJUST DATA3 Center line for rotate copying 7 to 7 0 0 17 mm Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Reference Original Copy Copy example 1 exampl
144. e cassette 1 lift reaching the upper limit Lower lift limit switch LICSW L Detects the cassette 2 lift reaching the upper limit Upper paper size length switch PESWAU srra unaa Detects the length of paper in the cassette 1 Lower paper size length switch PESW L errena teetara Eea E en Ei Detects the length of paper in the cassette 2 Upper paper size width switch PWSW U oe iasanen ensaia iueiai Detects the width of paper in the cassette 1 Lower paper size width switch PWSWE L urnon ier Detects the width of paper in the cassette 2 MP paper switch MPPSW eseese Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray MP paper size length switch MPPLSW ceeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeereteeeeeeeteaeene Detects the length of paper on the MP tray MP paper size width switch MPPWSW ceeeceeeceseceteneeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeenes Detects the width of paper on the MP tray 2 2 2 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37 2GN 2GP 2GR Feed switch 1 FSW1 eeen Controls feed clutch 1 drive timing Feed switch 2 FSW2 eessen Controls feed clutch 2 drive timing Feed switch 3 FSW seeen Controls feed clutch 3 drive timing MP feed switch MPFSW ceeeeeeeee Controls MP feed clutch drive timing Scanner home position switch SHPSW Detects the optical system in the home position Original detection switch ODSW Operates t
145. e drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking Purpose To check the drum status Method Press the start key The drum counter count is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U112 Setting toner refresh operation Description Sets the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying Purpose To change the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying if image flow level is low Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting ON TIME SEC Toner refresh operation time 50 to 150 sec 120 BIAS TIME MSEC Developing bias on time 500 to 1000 msec 700 30 ppm 540 40 50 ppm 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 39 2GN 2GP 2GR ican Description U114_ Setting separation charger mode Description Sets the separation charger mode Purpose To change the setting if the fuser offset or carrier leaking occurs Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display
146. e following gas pipes lightning rods ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper AUtMOFitles skis ae ee TE aE r a ee ae ae ev eee ea A es CAUTION e Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface the copier may tip over causing injury SO e Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock SO Do not install the copier near a radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may cause fiigir eien ence ecree rer ie eaa aAa aeS D E RAAE R EAE ier rece E TA ARE S Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance SO Always handle the machine by the correct locations when MOVING it ee ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeettaeeeeeeeaees Q Always use anti toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple leading to injury sssssssessssseirssssrrrssssirrrssrirnnsssrennsssne Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively Protect the eyes If toner or developer is acciden tally ingested drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi ately If it gets into the eyes rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical AULSNTION ners
147. e inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as mer cury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine based organic solvents Select a room with good ventilation Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine Machine front 1000 mm 39 3 8 Machine rear 100 mm 3 15 16 Machine right 300 mm 11 13 16 Machine left 300 mm 11 13 16 2 100 mm 3 15 16 N 1 2300 mm 11 13 16 gt 2 300 mm 11 13 16 2 1000 mm 39 3 8 Figure 1 2 1 Installation dimensions 1 2 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation 1 Installation procedure 1 2 2 C Start y y Unpack Connect the power cord Y Y Remove the tapes spacers and pad Install the fixing bracket y Install the optional paper feeder y y Carry out initial developer setting maintenance item U130 Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames y y Output an own status report maintenance item U000 Release of cassette lift plate y y Exit maintenance mode Load paper y y Print out the u ser setting list Install the toner container y y Make test copies Install the waste toner box y y Attachin
148. e switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch eject switch feedshift switch 2 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from cassette 1 Jam code 10 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley of the cassette 1 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 1 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the upper paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the upper paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the upper paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 51 3 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from cassette 2 Jam code 11 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley of the cassette 2 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 2 actua
149. each stack on the main tray and on the internal tray in the optional 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description MAIN TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the main tray MIDDLE TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for sort copying or sta ple copying Setting the number of sheets of stack on the main tray 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Description 0 3000 sheets 1 1500 sheets Initial setting 0 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the number of sheets of stack on the internal tray 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Description 0 For sort copying 10 sheets for staple copying 50 sheets 1 For sort copying 10 sheets for staple copying 30 sheets Initial setting 0 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 48 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U240 Checking the operation of the finisher Description Turns each motor and solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher ON Purpose To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to
150. ec onds after the main tray has descended During main tray ascent the main tray upper limit detection sensor or the main tray load detection sensor stays on for more than 2 s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the main tray motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main tray motor Replace the main tray motor Defective main tray upper limit detec tion sensor main tray load detection sensor main tray lower limit detec tion sensor Replace the sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Tray elevation motor problem optional document finisher When the tray elevation motor is driving the ON status of the tray lower limit sen sor or surface view sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed The tray elevation motor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The tray elevation motor malfunc tions Replace the tray elevation motor The tray lower limit sensor push paper sensor surface view sensor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cabl
151. ec tion Jam code 72 Defective switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Original feed switch original registration switch 27 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original conveying section Jam code 73 Defective DP timing switch 1 Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 1 4 17 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 28 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original registration section Jam code 74 Defective original registra tion switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 29 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original registration section Jam code 75 Defective switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Original registration switch DP timin
152. ection 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp as follows Procedure 1 Remove the original cover or the DP 2 Remove ten screws and remove the rear cover 3 Remove two screws and remove the scan ner right cover 4 Remove the platen Remove the connector of the inverter PWB Release the wire from the wire saddles and pull the connector out from the opening on the rear of the scanner unit an 2GN 2GP 2GR Rear cover Platen Scanner right cover Figure 1 5 25 Opening Wire saddles Connector Figure 1 5 26 1 5 11 2GN 2GP 2GR 7 Remove the sponge from the wire guide and release the wire 8 Move the mirror 1 frame to notch position and release the wire from the wire holder 9 Remove the screw and remove the expo sure lamp 10 Replace the exposure lamp and install the lamp 11 Refit the platen scanner right cover and rear cover 1 5 12 Wire holder a Sponge Figure 1 5 27 Exposure lamp Figure 1 5 28 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced NOTE When fitting the wires be sure to use those specified below Machine front P N 302GR17110 gray Machine rear P N 302GR17100 black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools P N 302C968310 Two scanner wire stoppers P N 3596811 Proce
153. ed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 1 4 13 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 9 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in 3000 sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section Jam code 17 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen sor 1 With 5 V DC present at CN6 6 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN6 5 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 1 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sensor 1 Check if paper feeder paper conveying clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper con veying clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper convey ing clutch Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 10 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in verti cal paper conveying section Jam code 18 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 act
154. ed jam oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step REGST Amount of slack in the reading original 31 t031 0 0 17 mm from the DP REGST MIX Amount of slack in the reading original 31 to 31 0 17 mm from the DP in the auto selection mode Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys The greater the value the larger the amount of slack the smaller the value the smaller the amount of slack If an original non feed jam or oblique feed occurs increase the setting value If wrinkling of original occurs decrease the value 7 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the developing unit number Description Displays the developing unit number Purpose To check the developing unit number Method Press the start key The number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 80 Displaying the developing unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the developing counter Purpose To check the c
155. ed when initial operation even if 1500 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the blade motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective blade motor Replace the blade motor Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Centerfold staple motor problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Jam89 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC9 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the centerfold staple motor and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold staple motor Replace the centerfold staple motor Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 39 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Centerfold side registration motor 2 problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1000 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC7 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold side regi
156. eecseeeesneeeseseeeeeseneeeneeeseneeteeeates 1 4 44 1 No image appears entirely White eee eeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeneeessaeeesaeeeeeaeeeseneeeneeeees 1 4 45 2 No image appears entirely DIACK eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeesaaeeseaneeesaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeneeeees 1 4 45 8 majes too gE a a ra Ee a aa aaa a naaa a aa Eea E Aee SEEE cases cesctessueeibandhasiessasanestons 1 4 46 4 Background is ViSiblesisi mi geenna ae ee a a A a ea aa ae 1 4 46 5 A white line appears longitudinally 2 ee eeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeteneeeeeeneeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeeeseaeesenaeeeeeneeeees 1 4 46 6 A black line appears longitudinally oe eee eeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeteneeeeeeneeeeeaaeeseeeeeenaeeseeaeeeenaeeeeeeeeees 1 4 47 7 A black line appears laterally eee eeseeeeenseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseaeeeeeaaeeseaeeeensaeeeneaeeesseseneeeees 1 4 47 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the Othel cecceeeceeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeseaeeeeessaes 1 4 47 9 Black dots appear ON the IMAGE eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeneesesaeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseaeeeseeeeseeaeeeesaeseneeeees 1 4 47 10 Image IS DIGIM Edirnede eden dese de titde dese cued iea ria de attire die seeds ee eet a eres ee 1 4 48 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original eseeesseeesteeeees 1 4 48 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original
157. eeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift switch 1 Paper feeder lift motor 2 error optional paper feeder When optional cassette 4 is inserted paper feeder lift switch 2 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 2 Replace paper feeder lift motor 2 Defective paper feeder lift motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 2 Defective paper feeder lift switch 2 Check if YC1 7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift switch 2 Paper feeder lift motor 1 error optional 3000 sheet paper feeder A motor over current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Paper feeder lift motor 1 does not rotate correctly the motor is over loaded Check the gears and remedy if nece
158. eedshift sole noid or toner feed solenoid does not operate Broken solenoid coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the solenoid Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U033 and check if the solenoid operates If not replace the engine PWB 1 4 51 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 6 The exposure lamp does not turn on or off Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective scanner PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC6 3 on the scanner PWB goes low If not replace the scanner PWB If YC6 3 on the scanner PWB is always low replace the scanner PWB Defective inverter PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC1 3 on the inverter PWB go low If not replace the inverter PWB If the exposure lamp does not turn off with YC1 3 on the inverter PWE high replace the inverter PWB Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp even if checking or correcting other measures 7 Main charging is not performed Broken main charger wire Leaking mai
159. eedshift solenoid 2 TFSSOL2 Tray feedshift solenoid 3 TFSSOL3 Tray feedshift solenoid 4 TFSSOL4 Tray feedshift solenoid 5 TFSSOL5 Tray feedshift solenoid 6 TFSSOL6 Mail paper entry solenoid MPESOL 2 To stop operation press the stop key Method Checking the motor of the centerfold unit 1 Select the item to be operated The operation starts Display Motor CONV MOTOR BLADE MOTOR BUNDLE UP MOTOR BUNDLE DOWN MTR WIDTH TEST A3 WIDTH TEST LD STAPLE MOTOR Centerfold main motor CMM Blade motor BLM Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 CPCBM1 Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 2 CPCBM2 Centerfold side registration motor 1 2 CSRM1 2 Centerfold side registration motor 1 2 CSRM1 2 Centerfold staple motor CSTM 2 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key with the operation stopped The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No Description 2GN 2GP 2GR U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Description Displays the status of each switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To check the operation of each switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be checked Display Description FINISHER MAIL BOX BOOKLET Checking the switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Che
160. eeed 2 4 3 Chart of image adjustment procedures eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeaeeceaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseeseaeeseeseaeesieeeeaeseeeeaeee 2 4 7 General wiring diagrams moei ioe arial rae ee tenia ciel ii 2 4 9 INSTALLATION GUID PAPER FEEDER 3000 SHEETS PAPER FEEDER DOCUMENT FINISHER 3000 SHEETS DOCUMENT FINISHER DOCUMENT PROCESSOR BUILT IN FINISHER JOB SEPARATOR FAX System M Data Security Kit C 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 1 1 Specifications TY PG isa Soins Hl ei een Desktop Copying SYStOM eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee Indirect electrostatic system OriginialS get a Nelleilel easel Sheets books and three dimensional objects Maximum size A3 Ledger Original feed system cere Fixed COPY paper ou eee eeseeeeeseteeeeeeeteeees Weight Cassette 60 105 g m2 MP tray 45 200 g m2 Types Cassette Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched High quality and Custom1 8 MP tray Plain Transparency Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched Envelope Cardstock Thick paper High quality and Custom1 8 Copying SIZES eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeees Cassette A3 Ledger A5R StatementR MP tray A3 Ledger A6R StatementR Magnification ratios eee Manual mode 25 400 1 increments Auto copy mode fixed ratios Metric 1 1 1 0 1 4 00 1 2 00 1 1 41 1 1 22 1 1 15 1 0 86 1 0 81 1 0 70 1 0 50 1 0 25 Inch 1 1 1 0 1 4 00 1 2 00 1
161. eeeseneeeeeaeeeenaeeeseneeeesaaeeseneeeersaeeees 1 5 25 15 5 Developing S6CtON 2 y seein cteet wkd beet ihe ates tet a e rar aot eaten teeter pee dee 1 5 26 1 Detaching and refitting the developing Unit ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseneeeensaeeees 1 5 26 12526 Transter SOCUOM niea ennan ake davies eal Aneta teeta ald ee E e a aE Bion 1 5 27 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller Unit ee eeceeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaaeereaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeessaeeeeeneeene 1 5 27 527 FUSCr SCCUON iiss adie ate ie eth altel 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller Separation ClAWS eeeceeseeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeneeeees 1 5 29 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeessaeeseneeeees 1 5 30 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser heater oo eee eeeeeeesneeeeeneeeteneeeeteaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeneeees 1 5 31 5 Detaching and refitting the Neat roller oo eee eeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeesesaeeeseneeeesneeseneeeeeneeeees 1 5 32 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 000 eeeeeeeneeeeeneeteneeeeenaeeeeeneeeseaeeeeeeeeees 1 5 33 7 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral squareness eee eeeeeseeereeeeeeeneeeees 1 5 34 19 8 ONE Sinn eee as oto ares EO NEIE E EE AE ELE E TEA EA 1 5 35 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone filte
162. eft right difference Curling Machine 0 8 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 0 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 5 mm 375 mm Using DP 2 5 mm 375 mm Cassette 2 5 mm MP tray 2 5 mm Duplex copying 2 5 mm Cassette 1 5 mm or less MP tray 1 5 mm or less Duplex copying 2 0 mm or less Cassette 2 0 mm MP tray 2 0 mm Duplex mode 3 0 mm Simplex mode 10 0 mm or less Duplex mode 10 0 mm or less 2 4 8 2GN 2GP 2GR
163. egistration DP timing switch 1 DPTSW1 does not turn on within 4979 pulse specified time 76 DP timing switch 2 DPTSW2 does not turn on within 2500 pulse An original jam in the specified time original feed conveying section 78 The document processor top cover is opened during orig Document processor inal feeding top cover open Optional 80 Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the doc 15 s finisher Jam between the fin ument finisher within specified time of the paper entry isher and machine 3000 sheet document finisher only sensor PES turning on 81 Paper entry sensor nonarrival jam 3000 sheet document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned off even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 1360 ms 30 ppm 1052 ms 40 50 ppm 3000 sheet document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 1360 ms 30 ppm 1052 ms 40 50 ppm 3000 sheet document finisher The paper entry sensor PES does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm Document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 2627 ms Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW is not turned on even if a s
164. egistration home position sensor Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Side registration motor 2 problem optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 s passed Jam 88 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the internal tray PWB and the connector of side registration motor 2 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective side reg istration motor 2 Replace side registration motor 2 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Finisher rear side registration motor problem optional built in finisher When the rear side registration home position sensor is turned on during initial ization the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses When the rear side registration home position sensor is turned off during initial ization the sensor did not turn on in three seconds The rear side reg istration motor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy o
165. el to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 Check see service manual of paper feeder Optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 2 paper feeder paper conveying clutch Electrical problem with clutch Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 5 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from optional cassette 4 Jam code 13 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley forwarding pulley and separation pulley of optional cassette 4 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective paper feeder feed switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the paper feeder main PWB check if C
166. engine PWB Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates If not replace the engine PWB 3 The scanner motor or cooling fan motor 1 to 13 does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the motor 4 The upper lower paper feed clutch feed clutch 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch MP feed clutch reg istration clutch or duplex feed clutch does not operate Broken clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the clutch Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the engine PWB goes low If not replace the engine PWB Upper paper feed clutch YC14 B1 on the engine PWB Lower paper feed clutch YC14 B4 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 1 YC11 14 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 2 YC13 A12 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 3 YC13 A5 on the engine PWB MP paper feed clutch YC6 A9 on the engine PWB MP feed clutch YC6 A11 on the engine PWB Registration clutch YC14 B6 on the engine PWB Duplex feed clutch YC10 B2 on the engine PWB 5 The f
167. ent of the paper stop timing 1 Select PUNCH POS ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of the paper stop timing 10 to 10 0 0 49 mm If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A increase the preset value If the distance is larger than the value A decrease the preset value O Figure 1 3 19 Preset value A 5 5 2 mm inch 9 5 2 mm metric 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting adjustment of front rear side registration home position 1 Select WIDTH F HP ADJ or WIDTH R HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of front side registration home position 10 to 10 0 0 314 mm Adjustment of rear side registration home position 10 to 10 0 0 314 mm 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 5 Enter maintenance mode U240 and select FINISHER MOTOR then WIDTH TEST A3 The width guides of the internal tray will move to A3 size position 6 Pull the internal tray insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides 7 Repeat the above adj
168. eparation pulley to the MP unit 23 Refit the MP unit Film Figure 1 5 20 24 When the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or the MP separation pulley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 to clear the jam counter see page 1 3 76 1 5 8 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner Take the following procedure when the left or right registration cleaner is to be replaced Procedure Removing the left registration cleaner 1 Open the left cover 1 and remove the trans fer roller unit see page 1 5 27 2 Remove two roller stoppers and remove the left registration roller 3 Remove two registration guides 4 Remove the left registration cleaner 5 Replace the left registration cleaner and reg istration guides Install the left registration cleaner and regis tration guides 6 Refit the left registration roller roller stop pers and transfer roller unit Registration guide stopper Figure 1 5 21 Left registration cleaner wo wee Figure 1 5 22 1 5 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Removing the right registration cleaner 1 2 3 Remove the developing unit and drum unit see pages 1 5 26 and 24 Remove the right registration cleaner Replace the right registration cleaner and Install the cleaner Refit the drum unit and developing unit 1 5 10 Figure 1 5 23 1 5 3 Optical s
169. equently in the paper conveying or fuser sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections copying is charged without a copy being made To prevent this the copy timing should be made later Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the copy count timing Display Description FEED When secondary paper feed starts EJECT When the paper is ejected Initial setting EJECT 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Adjust the preset value using the or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Seiting service status page Description Determines displaying the toner coverage report on reporting Purpose According to user request changes the setting Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press COVERAGE Highlighted ON Non highlighted OFF Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 61 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U326 Setting the black line cleaning indic
170. er step Leading edge registration for memory image printing 47 to 47 0 1 0 mm Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 27 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N SCANNER Automatic adjustment in the scanner section 302F Z56990 DP FACE UP Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 2AC68241 section first page DP FACE DOWN Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 2AC68241 303JX57010 section second page 303JX57020 Remarks Cut the trailing edge of the original as shown when the specified original P N 2AC68241 is used 128 1mm 60 1mm Cut wi
171. er to 2 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initial ized based on the destination setting 4 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an intialization error Refer to the table of the error codes on P 1 3 14 When ERROR 09 occurred turn main power switch off then on format the hard disk using maintenance item U024 and execute initialization using maintenance item U021 For other errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U021 Initializing backup memory Description Initializes only the backup data for image processing Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to initialize Display Description MAIN ENGINE Initialize the backup data of main PWB and engine PWB SCANNER Initialize the backup data of scanner PWB DP Initialize the backup data of DP main PWB Select the destination Display Description INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric Asia Pacific specifications 4 Press the start key All data in the backup RAM is initialize
172. erence Scanner gt Scanner left margin right margin 2 1 0mm 2 1 0mm Scanner trailing edge margin 2 1 0mm Figure 1 3 25 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U404 P 1 3 67 Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U404_ Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the optional DP is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode u402 U403 P 1 3 65 P 1 3 66 Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step A MARGIN Left margin first page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm B MARGIN Leading edge margin first page 0 to 10 0 2 5 0 1 mm C MARGIN Right margin first page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm D MARGIN Trailing edge margin first page 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm A MARGIN BACKk Left margin second page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm B MARGIN BACk Leading edge margin second 0 to 10 0 2 5 0 1 mm page C MARGIN BACKk Right margin second page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm
173. ermi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon motor Replace the laser scanner unit Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation BD steady state problem ASIC detects a BD error A for 2 s after the polygon motor rotation has been sta bilized Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Broken cleaning lamp wire While the cleaning lamp is on the bro ken cleaning lamp wire detection signal is detected for 2 s continuously Defective cleaning lamp Replace the cleaning lamp Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Fuser heater break Fuser thermistor 1 is detected 40 C 104 F below with 10 s continuously dur ing warm up and ready in Defective fuser heater M or S Replace the fuser heater M or S Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 Check the mounting state of the fuser ther mistor 1 If any problem is found repa
174. es D 30 mm E 148 5 mm and C 267 mm along the main scanning direction 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained D F 2 E 2 2 Enter the values solved using the keys in SUB ADJ 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 73 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U425 Setting CIS 1 Select the item to be set Display Description N950 Setting the N950 patch for the original for adjustment N850 Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment N770 Setting the N770 patch for the original for adjustment N650 Setting the N650 patch for the original for adjustment N500 Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment N300 Setting the N300 patch for the original for adjustment CYAN Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment MAGENTA Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment YELLOW Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment RED Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment GREEN Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment BLUE Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range L Setting the L value 0 0 to 100 0 a Setting the a value 200 0 to 200 0 b Setting the b value 200 0 to 200 0
175. es originals Cleaning lamp CL uu eeceeeceeeeteeeeeeeerenees Removes residual charge from the drum surface Fuser heater M FH M ec Heats the heat roller Fuser heater S FH S Heats the heat roller Fuser unit thermostat 1 FTS1 cee Prevents overheating in the fuser section Fuser unit thermostat 2 FTS2 ee Prevents overheating in the fuser section Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode Dehumidifies the cassette section Cassette heater CH 2 2 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 2 6 2 3 1 Power source PWB Power source PWB Zero cross signal output circuit Heater control circuit 2GN 2GP 2GR 24VD 24VDF 12VD 5V 5VD 5VDF 3R3VD SLEEP ZCROSS Cassette heater Figure 2 3 1 Power source PWB diagram Fuser heater FH LIVE Figure 2 3 2 Power source PWB silk screen diagram 1 61 2 LAL YC2 YC4 i 9 7 vce A YC3 1 YC1 i 7 vc 14 i i YC8 YC10 1 0 2 3 1 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description TB Connected to the AC inlet LIVE COM LIVE LIVE 120 VAC 220 240 V AC 120 VAC 220 240 V AC 120 VAC 220 240 V AC 120 VAC 220 240 V AC AC power input AC power input AC power output AC power input Connected to the engine PWB 24VDR GND GND GND 3 3VD 5VD 24VD 24V DC 3 3 V DC 5V DC 24V DC 24 V DC power output Ground
176. eseeseeeeneeeees 1 4 48 13 Paper Creases iii 4seiseeiitlardhedhain he babii Mia dh dion ae ad eed ae 1 4 48 14 ONNSEL OCCUIS icd c5 sis tees sebghethar sacs shih vats sad T senda sndeasseadaciags E TEE 1 4 49 15 Image is palttly MISSING ii reesen irean aipa Eaa eee Liens eee eee ve eee cat ieee 1 4 49 16 FUSING IS POOR REE AA A 1 4 49 1 7 Image IS OUUOTTOCUS ss a r a a a I AI ob en A al he i Shae et hae eet 1 4 49 18 Image center does not align with the original center ee eeeeeeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeseeeeeeneeeeeed 1 4 50 1 9 Image isnot square aiia ner hides catia divigi a E faith ied MEH R a levies 1 4 50 1 4 4 Electric problem Snin iaaea r eerie Mii lee eb evened eles 1 4 51 14 5 Mechanical problems sirra miiie cence deans engin Nue stein esate wiv revdie ey ani o Aand I a raene 1 4 55 1 5 Assembly and Disassembly 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly cc eeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeesaaeeseaaeseeneeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeees 1 5 1 1 PRECAUTIONS ie onar diis vel ceed erences pales ow Hae Ea a A a Aaa Era ATAA E Goel tet aa ea aa 1 5 1 2 DIUM eiia en a ected eee EG 1 5 1 EERE A adhe peacock savhey ach E A A ei ag te tie ie Gutta acess 1 5 1 1 5 2 Paper feed SECI M siisscekcsscedite aegis ekate hag cca cesta ged aa steed a a beeing evasquesdhesevdegvpencoiecolav beatae dante doe 1 5 2 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys
177. eteseeeeeeeceneseeceeeseeeseseceneneneseneeeeseseeeeseeeeseenenensneetses 2 1 13 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing Sections ecceeceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeesaeseaeeeeaeesseeseeeseaeeseaeeeaeeeaees 2 1 14 22127 FUSOK SOCUOMN iiot meneran sree raa a aa ab vans caves gta du ange ai ats ai hae eee 2 1 15 2 1 8 Eject and switchback SeCTIONS eecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeneneessesenenesgeeeesenseseeeeseneeeseaeseeeeneseeeeeses 2 1 16 2 129 Duplex SECT O a aea a a ae a aa a aa aE a a EAr A aaae aides e ea E aaa da e E a aai ea iia 2 1 17 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex Copying ssesssessssssrisesrrsrrissrirnsiinstirnntinnstinnetnnntinnetennetnnnene 2 1 18 2 2 Electrical Parts Layout 2 2 1 Electrical parts layo T i a a e a E a ae aaa e ar aAa a aE a Eaa 2 2 1 OPMAAT A A A 2 2 1 AREE EEE ao EET A E A E E 2 2 2 3 MOIS fer esi cease a ee a A E ei a eae we 2 2 4 4 Other electrical COMPONENMS ccceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceseeseeeeeaeecsaeseaeessaeesaeeeeaeesseeseaeseaeeseaeseaeeeaeesaas 2 2 5 2 3 Operation of the PWBs 2 321 PowerSource WB daien off at tevawenl sd a a aa a a aa A a 2 3 1 2 3 2 Engine PWB mio erede a a a e E A O O E a A a a Ek 2 3 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 4 Appendixes Maintenance parts lit vos aucisiea tit i e lel eh oe Ae ad ho 2 4 1 Periodic maintenance procedures 0 cceeesceeesceeeeneeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeaaeeessaeeeesaeeeeaeeeseaeeeesnaeeseaeeennee
178. ette 1 is inserted upper lift limit switch does not turn on within 12 s of upper lift motor turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of upper lift motor and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of upper lift motor Replace upper lift motor Defective upper lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace upper lift motor Defective upper lift limit switch Check if YC13 B9 on the engine PWB goes low when upper lift limit switch is turned off If not replace upper lift limit switch Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of upper lift limit switch and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Lower lift motor error When cassette 2 is inserted lower lift limit switch does not turn on within 12 s of lower lift motor turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of lower lift motor and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of lower lift motor Replace lo
179. ex section is indi cated during copying jam in duplex paper conveying section 2 Jam code 61 Broken duplex paper con veying switch or feed switch 1 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Duplex paper conveying switch feed switch 1 24 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying no original feed Jam code 70 Defective original feed switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the original feed motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary 25 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original feed conveying sec tion Jam code 71 Defective DP timing switch 2 Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 26 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original feed conveying s
180. f stapler moving motor 2 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective stapler moving motor 2 Replace stapler moving motor 2 Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 38 Stapler motor problem optional 3000 sheet document finisher Jam 82 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective stapler motor Replace the stapler motor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Centerfold unit communication error optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Communication with the centerfold unit is not possible although the connection is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC22 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold unit set switch Replace the centerfold unit set switch Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation
181. feeder right lift position prob lem optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper feeder switch 1 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper feeder lift switch 1 Check if YC5 4 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift switch 1 Defective paper feeder lift motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 2 The paper feeder right lift does not rise properly Check the gears and belts and remedy if necessary Paper feeder unit communication problem optional paper feeder 3000 sheet paper feeder No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a communica tion error parity or checksum error is detected five times in succession Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective paper feeder main PWB Replace t
182. finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation EEPROM problem optional document finisher Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective EEPROM or fin isher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Mail box communication error optional mail box of 3000 sheet doc ument finisher Communication with the mail box is not possible although the connection is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of the connector of the mail box and the connector YC7 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the mail box main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Mail box drive motor problem optional mail box of 3000 sheet doc ument finisher The motor lock signal is detected above 500 ms during driving the mail box drive motor Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC2 on the mail box main PWB and the connector of the mail box drive motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective mail box drive motor Replace the mail box drive motor Defective PWB Replace the mail box main PW
183. for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 4 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting Setting the backup kit Relay board maintenance Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Checking the developing unit number Displaying the developing unit history HDD scandisk Checking clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Checking the scanner count Outputting a VTC PG pattern Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Contents of the maintenance mode items Maintenance item No Description U000 1 3 6 Outputting an own status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items and paper jam and service call occurrences Outputs the event log or service status page Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items or paper jam or service call occurrences Before initial izing or replacing the backup RAM output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output Display Output list MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modes EVENT LOG Outputs the event log SERVICE
184. ft driven by the lift motor and other components Each cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper Paper is fed from the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time via the torque limiter Ee AS oe SELIM of Figure 2 1 1 Paper feed from the cassettes 1 and 2 1 Upper forwarding pulley 17 Left registration roller 2 Lower forwarding pulley 18 Registration switch RSW 3 Upper paper feed pulley 19 Feed roller 1 4 Lower paper feed pulley 20 Feed pulley 5 Upper separation pulley 21 Feed switch 1 FSW1 6 Lower separation pulley 22 Feed roller 2 7 Upper paper switch PSW U 23 Feed pulley 8 Lower paper switch PSW L 24 Feed switch 2 FSW2 9 Upper lift limit switch LICSW U 25 Feed roller 3 10 Lower lift limit switch LICSW L 26 Feed pulley 11 Upper paper width switch PWSW U 27 Feed switch 3 FSW3 12 Lower paper width switch PWSW L 28 Front registration guide 13 Upper paper length switch PLSW U 29 Paper conveying guide 1
185. g from the primary paper feed unit Pull the separation pulley shaft in the direc tion of the arrow and remove the separation pulley Replace the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Install the separation and paper feed pulleys to the primary paper feed unit Install the forwarding pulley to the forward ing pulley retainer When refitting the forwarding pulley orient it correctly as shown in Figure 1 5 6 Refit the forwarding pulley retainer to the pri mary paper feed unit Refit the primary paper feed unit When the forwarding pulley paper feed pul ley separation pulley or the primary paper feed unit is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 to clear the jam counter see page 1 3 76 2GN 2GP 2GR Stop ring Stop ring Paper feed pulley shaft Paper feed pulley Figure 1 5 4 Separation pulley shaft ae Stop ring C3 Separation pulley Figure 1 5 5 Machine front Machine rear Forwarding pulley Figure 1 5 6 1 5 3 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Procedure Removing the MP unit 1 Remove four screws and remove the right lower cover 2 Remove two screws and two MP holder plates 3 Remove two pins two screws and two con nectors and then remove the MP unit Removin
186. g switch 1 30 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original feed conveying sec tion Jam code 76 Defective DP timing switch 2 Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 31 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying jam between finisher and machine Jam code 80 Defective paper entry sen sor Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indica tion of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis played in reverse 32 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper jam during paper insertion to the finisher Jam code 81 3000 sheet document finishe r document finisher Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper entry sen sor 3000 sheet document finisher Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indica tion of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis played in reverse Document finisher With 5 V DC present at CN14 1 and CN14 3 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 2 and CN14 4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when
187. g the MP separation pulley 4 Reverse the MP unit and remove the spring and stop ring from the MP separation pulley shaft and move the bushing inside 1 5 4 MP holder Pin plate Figure 1 5 8 Bushing Stop ring MP separation pully shaft Figure 1 5 9 5 Raise the MP separation shaft as shown in the figure remove the holder plate and the bushing and then remove the MP separa tion pulley Take care not to remove the spring pin of the gear at the rear of the MP separation pulley shaft If it is removed refit it to its original position Removing the MP paper feed pulley 6 Remove the connector of the MP paper switch and remove the wire from the three clamps 7 Remove the screw and remove the MP unit cover 8 Remove the stop ring and bushing on the front of the MP paper feed pulley shaft 2GN 2GP 2GR Holder plate Bushing Connector Figure 1 5 11 KG SS b Bushing Figure 1 5 12 1 5 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 9 Raise the MP paper feed pulley shaft as shown in the figure remove the stop ring and then remove the MP paper feed pulley Removing the MP forwarding pulley 10 Remove the sponge 11 Remove the stop ring and MP paper feed clutch When refitting insert the cutout in the MP paper feed clutch over the stopper on the machine 12 Remove the screw from the cam at the rear of the MP forwarding pulley shaft and move the cam and the bushing toward the inner side
188. g the language label 230 V specifications only Install the optional original cover or the DP y Install other optional devices y Completion of the machine installation 2GN 2GP 2GR ving the machine Mo nd hold them the right and left sides a rying handles on When moving the machine pull out the four car Figure 1 2 2 1 2 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Unpacking 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Figure 1 2 3 Unpacking Machine Outer case Inner frame Skid Bottom front left pad Bottom front right pad Bottom rear left pad Bottom rear right pad Machine cover 0 Upper pad Caution Place the machine on a level surface 1 2 4 Spacer Document tray Hinge joints Bar code labels Power cord Plastic bag Leaflet Plastic bag M3 x 8 screws Operation guide 2GN 2GP 2GR Remove the tapes spacers and pad Remove two tapes Spacers 2 Pull the lever and operation section is low ered 3 Remove two spacers Remove waste textile on the operation panel if any Remove the pad Remove the tape holding the power cord e oe Pad Figure 1 2 4 Install the optional paper feeder 1 Install the optional paper feeder as necessary 2 Verify levelness at the four corners of the platen using a level gauge and adjust the level bolts at the bott
189. g the maintenance item No is displayed Checking the fuser temperature Description Displays the fuser temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Purpose To check the fuser temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Method Press the start key The fuser temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade C and the absolute humidity is displayed in percentage Display Description FIX CENTER TEMP Fuser center temperature C FIX EDGE TEMP Fuser edge temperature C SURROUND TEMP Ambient temperature C HUMIDITY Absolute humidity Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 43 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U200 Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light Method Press the start key All the LEDs on the operation panel light Press the stop key or wait for 10 s The LEDs turns off and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Initializing the touch panel Description Automatically correct the positions of the X and Y axes of the touch panel Purpose To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced Method 1 Press the start key The key displayed at the upper left of the touch panel fla
190. g the paper size for the paper A4 Letter A4 feeder 253 Switching between double and single Single Double counts 1 3 60 Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters Purpose Used to select according to the preference of the user copy service provider if A3 Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet single count or two sheets double count Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select double or single count Display Description SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper DBL CNT A3 LGR Double count for A3 Ledger size or larger DBL COUNT B4 Double count for B4 size or larger Initial setting DBL CNT A3 LGR 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters Purpose To be set according to user copy service provider request If a paper jam occurs frequently in the optional document finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection copies are provided without copy counts The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying To prevent this the copy timing should be made earlier If a paper jam occurs fr
191. gth switch or MP paper size length switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off replace the switch Upper paper size length switch YC13 B2 on the engine PWB Lower paper size length switch YC13 A19 on the engine PWB MP paper size length switch YC6 B11 on the engine PWB Defective upper lower paper size width switch or MP paper size width switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not change when the width guide in the cassette 1 2 or insert guide on the MP tray is moved replace the switch Upper paper size width switch YC12 3 4 5 on the engine PWB Lower paper size width switch YC12 9 10 11 on the engine PWB MP paper size width switch YC6 A1 A2 A3 on the engine PWB 14 A paper jam in the paper feed paper conveying fuser eject or duplex sec tion is indicated when the main power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch feedshift switch eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch feedshift switch eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn each switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 1 4 53 2GN 2GP 2GR
192. he item to be set Display Description WIDTH U HP ADJ Adjustment of upper side registration home position WIDTH L HP ADJ Adjustment of lower side registration home position STAPLE POS ADJ1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4 letter size STAPLE POS ADJ2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4 legal size STAPLE POS ADJ3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3 ledger size BOOKLET POS ADJ1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4 letter size BOOKLET POS ADJ2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4 legal size BOOKLET POS ADJ3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3 ledger size Setting adjustment of upper lower side registration home position 1 Select WIDTH U HP ADJ or WIDTH L HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of upper side registration home position 20 to 20 0 0 1 mm Adjustment of lower side registration home position 46 to 46 0 0 1 mm Press the start key The value is set Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Enter maintenance mode U240 and select BOOKLET then WIDTH TEST A3 The width guides of the centerfold unit will move to A3 size position Pull the centerfold unit insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides Repeat the above adjustment until paper is proper
193. he original size detection sensor Original size detection sensor OSDS Detects the size of the original Registration switch RSW uu cece Controls the secondary paper feed start timing Eject switch ESW cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section Feedshift switch FSSW aeee Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy Toner sensor TNS cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees Detects the toner density in the developing unit Toner container detection switch IGDSW scien eran weenie Detects the presence of the toner container Toner container sensor TCS eeeeeees Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container Waste toner box detection switch WIDSW cc2cchediiaeueadcih Detects the presence of the waste toner box Overflow sensor OFS eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeneees Detects when the waste toner box is full Humidity sensor HUMS eeeeeeeeeees Detects absolute humidity Fuser unit thermistor 1 FTH1 eee Detects the heat roller temperature Fuser unit thermistor 2 FTH2 eee Detects the heat roller temperature Front cover switch FRCSW eee Detects the opening and closing of the front cover Left cover 1 switch LC1SW ee Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 1 Left cover 2 switch LC2SW ee Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 2 Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW
194. he paper feeder main PWB and check for correct operation Paper feeder EEPROM error optional paper feeder When writing the data the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective paper feeder Replace the paper feeder with another unit and check the operation If the operation is normal replace or repair optional paper feeder 1 4 27 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Drive motor problem Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu ously after drive motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC11 on the engine PWB and the connector on the drive motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective drive motor Replace the drive m
195. he start key and make a copy at 1007 magnification Turn the main switch off and carry out steps 1 to 7 of 5 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 21 For copy example 1 Loosen the screw in the direction of the white arrow o gt Reduce the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the white arrow gt For copy example 2 Tighten the screw in the direction of the black arrow m Is the image correct Press the stop key to exit maintenance mode Increase the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the black arrow mp End LSU spacer Figure 1 5 49 1 5 23 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 4 Drum section 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit Procedure 1 Remove the developing unit see page 1 5 26 4 2 Remove the main charger unit see page 1 X ye 5 25 NG on 3 Remove the screw and the drum unit 4 Replace the drum unit and install the unit 5 Perform maintenance mode U110 to clear the counter value see page 1 3 39 Drum unit Figure 1 5 50 1 5 24 2 Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit Procedure 1 2 3
196. he time for maintenance is about to be reached by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U402 Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Descripuon range setting value per step LEAD Printer leading edge margin 0 to 236 74 0 1 mm A Printer left margin 80 to 236 70 0 1 mm C Printer right margin 118 to 236 68 0 1 mm TRAIL Printer trailing edge margin 118 to 236 85 0 1 mm TRAIL DUP Printer trailing edge margin in duplex 118 to 236 0 1 mm mode second side TRIAL MP Printer trailing edge margin MP tray 118 to 236 0 1 Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Printer leading edge margin 3 0 2 5mm Ejection direction reference Printer
197. hod Press the start key The maintenance count is displayed Clearing 1 Press the clear key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Setting 1 Enter a count using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 59 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020 in order to return the set ting to the value before replacement or initialization Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric Asia Pacific specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Supplement The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below To change the initial settings in those items be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destina tion Initial setting according to the destinations Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric item No Asia Pacific 208 Settin
198. ient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol CAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle A symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol AN General warning AN Warning of risk of electric shock AN Warning of high temperature indicates a prohibited action The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol General prohibited action Disassembly prohibited OO indicates that action is required The specific action required is shown inside the symbol General action required Remove the power plug from the wall outlet Gage Always ground the copier 1 Installation Precautions AAWARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections to one outlet they may cause fire or electric shock When using an extension cable always check that it is adequate for the rated current o oo eee eeeeee eee eeee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaas Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock Never connect the ground cable to any of th
199. ified time of its turning on when paper is ejected to the finisher tray from the intermediate tray Paper length 1123 ms 30 ppm Paper length 869 ms 40 50 ppm 84 Jam in eject section of right sub tray 3000 sheet document fin Eject switch 2 ESW2 is not turned off even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm Eject switch 2 ESW2 is not turned on even if a specified 1562 ms 30 ppm ener only time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was 1209 ms 40 50 ppm received Eject switch 2 ESW2 is not turned off within specified 2989 ms 30 ppm time of its turning on 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 85 Eject switch 3 ESW3 does not turn off within specified 1843 ms 30 ppm Jam in eject section of left sub tray 3000 sheet document fin time of paper entry sensor PES turning on 1426 ms 40 50 ppm Eject switch 3 ESW3 does not turn on within specified time of paper entry sensor PES turning on 1843 ms 30 ppm isher only Eject switch 3 ESWS3 is not turned off within specified 2989 ms 30 ppm time of its turning on 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 86 Internal tray entry sensor 1 ITPES1 is not turned on 2674 ms 30 ppm Jam in eject section of internal tray 1 3000 sheet document fin isher only even if a specified time has elapsed after the eject signal was received 1426 ms 40 50 ppm
200. image lighter decreasing it makes the image darker Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher and decreasing it makes the voltage lower Increasing the SC DATA setting makes the separation voltage higher and decreasing it makes the volt age lower 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 38 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger Description Changes the intervals at which the main charger is cleaned Purpose To change the setting when the background is visible Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Main charger cleaning operation intervals 0 to 20 unit 1000 sheets 5 When set to 0 the cleaning for the main charger is not operated 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U109 Displaying the drum type Description Displays the drum surface potential set as EEPROM of the drum unit Purpose To check the drum surface potential Method Press the start key Drum surface potential V is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U110 Checking th
201. ine PWB EPWB that has received the signal turns on the toner replenishment sole noid TNFSOL and replenishes toner from the toner container to the developing unit Also the toner container sensor TCS checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container Developing unit housing Developing roller Toner sensor TNS Doctor blade Right developing spiral Left developing spiral mmo est aOahWN were N Pre Lea Figure 2 1 13 Developing section Developing roller Right developing spiral Developing paddle gt Flow of the toner Figure 2 1 14 Flow of the toner 2 1 10 TNFSOL TNS SIG BVSEL1 BVSEL2 HVTPWB Figure 2 1 15 Developing section block diagram 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 11 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system and reversal processing is performed with a charged drum a Si and a charged magnetic toner With the single component developing system toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and charged when it passes through the magnetic toner blade The toner that has passed through the magnetic toner blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum toner moves between the drum and the
202. ing in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror while scanning in the auxiliary direction is pro vided by the rotating drum forming a static latent image on the drum The static latent image of the letter A for example is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2 1 12 Electrical charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other Main scanning direction 3 Auxilary scanning direction laser beam is on Figure 2 1 12 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 4 Developing section The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed the doctor blade and the develop ing spirals that agitate the toner When the toner sensor TNS detects a low toner level in the developing unit the toner replenishment signal is output to the engine PWB EPWB The eng
203. ion clutch RCL DUPLEX Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL MOTOR ON The drive motor DM and the paper feed motor PFM are turned ON To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking solenoid operation Description Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the solenoid to be operated 3 Press the start key The solenoid turns on for 1 s Display Solenoids TONER BRANCH1 BRANCH2 MOTOR ON Toner feed solenoid TNFSOL Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Feedshift solenoid FSSOL The drive motor DM and the paper feed motor PFM are turned on Optional To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 17 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U034_ Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted The setting screen for the selec
204. ir it Defective fuser thermostat Replace the fuser thermostat Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature Fuser thermistor 1 or 2 is detected 230 C 446 F or more for 40 ms Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Check the mounting state of the fuser ther mistor 1 or 2 If any problem is found repair it Defective fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Fuser thermistor break error The thermistor break signal is detected continuously for 500 ms Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Check the mounting state of the fuser ther mistor 1 or 2 If any problem is found repair it Defective fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 31 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Abnormally low fuser thermistor 3 temperature Fuser thermistor 1 is detected 100 C 212 F less than 1 s continuously during copying Defective fuser heater M or S Replace the fuser heater M or S Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 Check the mounting state of the f
205. irec U070 CIS MAIN ADJ P 1 3 26 tion Scanning adjustment 2 4 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Adjusting ia Maintenance mode ie order Item Image Description Tonner sae Original Page Remarks Adjusting magnification of the Original scanning speed U065 SUB SCAN ADJ Test chart P 1 3 23 U065 For copying an original placed on scanner in the auxiliary scanning the platen a direction scanning adjustment U070 CONVEY SPEED P 1 3 26 U070 For copying originals from the DP CIS SUB ADJ Adjusting the center line scanning Adjusting the original scan data U067 ADJUST DATA1 2 Test chart P 1 3 25 U067 For copying an original placed on adjustment image adjustment the platen a2 U072 ADJUST DATA1 2 3 P 1 3 30 U072 For copying originals from the DP Adjusting the leading edge registra Original scan start timing Uo066 ADJUST DATA1 2 Test chart P 1 3 24 U066 For copying an original placed on tion Scanning adjustment WA image adjustment the platen a3 A U071 ADJUST DATA1 2 P 1 3 28 U071 For copying originals from the DP 3 4 5 Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 B MARGIN Test chart P 1 3 66 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment the platen a4 U404 B MARG
206. itch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 39 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying main tray eject jam Jam code 88 Defective sensor switch Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Eject switch 1 side registration home position sensor 1 2 paper conveying belt position detection sensor 40 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying cen terfold unit jam Jam code 89 Defective sensor switch Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Centerfold paper entry sensor centerfold eject switch centerfold paper detection switch 41 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying mail box jam Jam code 90 Defective sensor switch Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Mail paper entry switch tray eject sensor 42 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying eject sensor non arrival
207. item press the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 82 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903 To remove paper jammed in the machine open the front cover left cover or pull the cassette out To remove original jammed in the optional DP open the document processor top cover or document processor reverse unit To remove the jammed paper in optional document finisher detach the finisher from the machine Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on 1 4 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ae Document processor Paper feeder Built in finisher p Lda ese ou 3000 sheet paper feeder 1 4 Figure 1 1 4 2 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time System 04 Cover is open during copying Cover open 05 Secondary paper feed does not start within specified time 30 s Secondary paper feed of arrival of paper at the registration section does not start 09 A communication sequence error occurs between the 3000 sheet
208. k pulley Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs 2 4 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance part location Covers Covers Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Dust filter 1 Every service Vacuum Section Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Dust filter 2 Every service Vacuum Maintenance Method part location Other Image quality Check and Every service adjust Section Maintenance cycle Points and cautions 2 4 6 Chart of image adjustment procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Adjusting Maintenance mode Item Image Description Original Page Remarks order Item No Mode Adjusting the lateral squareness Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner U993 PG2 P 1 5 23 printing adjustment unit printing adjustment Test chart Adjusting the magnification in the Polygon motor speed adjust
209. key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors Purpose To adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial range setting MAIN MOTOR Drive motor speed adjustment 40 to 40 2 EJECT MOTOR Eject motor speed adjustment 7 to 15 0 POLYGON MOTR Polygon motor speed adjustment 20 to 20 5 Adjustment 1 Press the system menu key 2 Press the start key to output an A3 Ledger VTC pattern Correct values for an A3 Ledger output are A 300 0 75mm B 270 1 35 mm Figure 1 3 7 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys A Drive motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction and decreasing it makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction B Polygon motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and longer in the auxiliary scanning direction decreasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction 5 Press the start key The value is set Completi
210. layed in minutes Clearing 1 Press the clear key 2 Press the start key The time is cleared Setting 1 Enter a drive time in minutes using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The time is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count for checking Purpose To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit Method Press the start key The developing counter count is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature Purpose Normally no change is necessary However can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper or solve a fuser problem on thick paper Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting DRIVE START TEMP Driving start temperature when 0 to 255 C 175 30 ppm warm up starts 185 40 50 ppm READY CONTROL T Control temperature for displaying 0 to 255 C 190 30 ppm Ready for copying 200 40 50 ppm PRINT CONTROL T Control temperature during printing 0 to 255 C 190 30 ppm
211. llers is not correct Check visually and replace 1 4 15 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 17 A paper jam in the fuser section is indi cated during copying jam in fuser section Jam codes 40 to 44 Broken eject switch or feed shift switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Eject switch feedshift switch 46 and 47 Check if the registration Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on clutch malfunctions the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the Check see page 1 4 51 registration clutch 18 Broken eject switch actua Check visually and replace switch A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copying jam in eject section tor Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse J de 50 ATPASES Registration switch eject switch Check if the registration Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on clutch malfunctions the touch panel to be turned on and off Che
212. low if the drum is not parallel to the fuser unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fuser section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer Procedure 1 5 34 Place the original on the contact glass Press the start key and make a test copy at 100 magnification Is the image correct End Original Copy example 1 Figure 1 5 69 Tighten the two screws Refit the front left cover and close the front cover Open the front cover and remove the front left cover See page 1 5 13 Loosen the screw holding each of the fuser unit and adjusting spacer For copy example 1 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the black arrow gt gt to raise the front position of the fuser unit For copy example 2 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the white arrow 4 to lower the front position of the fuser unit Fuser unit O a Copy example 2 O nen Screw Adjusting spacer Figure 1 5 70 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 8 Others 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter 1 and 2 Procedure 1 Remove the ozone filter 1 from the machine left side Ozone filter 1 Figure 1 5 71 2 Open the filter cover of the machine rear Ozone filter 2 side and remove the ozone filter 2 3 Replace the ozone filter 1 and 2 and i
213. low to above 2 Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit right winding from above to below 3 Wind the scanner wires around the scanner wire drum five turns from the rear toward the hole in the drum 4 Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum 5 Wind the scanner wires three turns from the inner toward the hole in the drum 6 Install the scanner wire stoppers to the scanner wire drum to fix the wires 7 Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit left winding from below to above 8 Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from below to above 9 Hook the scanner wires around the scanner wire guides at the machine left 10 Hook the round terminal onto the scanner wire spring 11 Five turns from Five turns from the rear toward the rear toward X Locating ball L Three turns from Three turns from the inner toward the inner toward Figure 1 5 35 1 5 16 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Remove the two scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum move aside the wires to inside Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position Refit the mirror 1 frame Move the mirror 1 and 2 f
214. low to replace the press roller Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 2 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 3 Remove the front and rear press springs gt A Remove the press roller from the fuser unit 5 Replace the press roller and install the roller to fuser unit Refit the upper fuser cover Refit the fuser unit NO 1 5 30 Press spring Press spring Figure 1 5 61 Press roller Figure 1 5 62 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser heater Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser heater Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 2 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 3 Remove two screws and the connector Connector 4 Pull out the fuser heater from the fuser unit Fuser heater Figure 1 5 64 5 Replace the fuser heater and install the heater to fuser unit Refit the upper fuser cover Refit the fuser unit No 1 5 31 2GN 2GP 2GR 5 Detaching and refitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller Procedure 1 2 3 N Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 Remove the press roller and fuser heater see page 1 5 30 and 31 Remove the fuser gear Fuser gear Figure 1 5 65 Remove the heat roller from the fuser unit Remove the C ring gear bearing and bush ing on the rear side of the heat roller and
215. lud ing paper jams self diagnostics errors and replacement of the toner container f Jam g Self diagnostic error h Maintenance item replacing Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location Refer to Paper Jam Log All instances including those are not occurred are displayed Indicates the log counter of self diagnos tics errors depending on cause See P 1 4 22 Example C6000 4 Self diagnostics error 6000 has happened four times Indicates the log counter depending on the maintenance item for maintenance T Toner container 00 Black M Maintenance kit 00 fixed Example TOO 1 The toner container has been replaced once 1 3 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U000 1 3 8 Service status page 1 MFP 1 Memory Status 3 Option Slot1 4 Option Slot2 5 Total Time 6 Local Time Zone 7 Data and Time 8 Time Server Service Status Page Firmware version 2GN_2000 XLG 368 2006 04 17 2 Controller Information 524288KB 524288KB 1048576KB Auto Continue Mode YO 0100 Amsterdan Auto Continue Timer Y1 10 27 2005 09 06 10 183 53 13 9 FRPO Status User Top Margin User Left Margin User Page Length Detail of Service status page Description A1 A2 100 A3 A4 100 A5 A6 100 Figure 1 3 2 Supplement System version System date Slot 1 RAM size Slot
216. lue Scanner leading edge registration Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 10 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U403 U071 U404 P 1 3 66 P 1 3 28 P 1 3 67 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U067 Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA 1 Scanner center line 70 to 70 0 0 08 mm ADJUST DATA2 Scanner center line rotate copying 25 to 25 0 0 10 mm Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Scanner center line nog Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 11 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustmen
217. lutch Correct 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 Precautions Before starting disassembly press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk When optional fax kit is installed be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly When handling PWBs printed wiring boards do not touch parts with bare hands The PWBs are susceptible to static charge Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge Use only the specified parts to replace the fuser unit thermostat Never substitute electric wires as the machine may be seriously damaged When replacing battery on a PWB dispose properly according to laws and regulations When removing the hook of the connector be sure to release the hook 2 Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F and at a relative humidity not higher than 85 RH Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the
218. ly in position 1 3 56 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U246 Setting adjustment of booklet stapling position 1 Select the STAPLE POS ADJ 1 STAPLE POS ADJ 2 or STAPLE POS ADJ 3 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4 letter size 10 to 10 0 0 55 mm Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4 legal size 10 to 10 0 0 55 mm Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3 ledger size 10 to 10 0 0 55 mm When staples are placed too far right sample 1 decrease the preset value When staples are placed too far left sample 2 increase the preset value Reference value within 2 mm Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 22 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting adjustment of center folding position 1 Select the BOOKLET POS ADJ1 BOOKLET POS ADJ2 or BOOKLET POS ADJ3 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of center folding position for A4 letter size 10to 10 0 0 55 mm Adjustment of center folding position for B4R legal size 10to 10 0 0 55 mm Adjustment of center folding position for A3R ledger size 10to 10 0 0 55 mm
219. me position switch Defective scanner motor Replace the scanner motor The mirror frame exposure lamp or scanner wire is defective Check if the mirror flames and exposure lamp are on the rail And check the scanner wire winds correctly Exposure lamp problem After the reading starting when input value at the time of exposure lamp illumi nation does not exceed the threshold value between 5 s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the scanner PWB and the connector on the inverter PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Defective CCD PWB Replace the CCD PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective exposure lamp or inverter PWB Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PWB Incorrect shading position Adjust the position of the contact glass shading plate If the problem still occurs replace the scanner home position switch 1 4 29 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures CIS lamp problem After the reading starting when input value at the time of CIS illumination does not exceed the threshold value between 5s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the main PWB and the connector on
220. ment U053 POLYGON MOTOR U053 test pattern P 1 3 21 main scanning direction printing s adjustment Adjusting the magnification in the Drive motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN MOTOR U053 test pattern P 1 3 21 auxiliary scanning direction print ing adjustment Adjusting the center line printing n Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU OUT LEFT U034 test pattern P 1 3 19 adjustment gt Adjusting the center line of the cas Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster U034 LSU OUT LEFT U034 test pattern Adjusts the position of each paper source settes and paper feeder printing adjustment pE Adjusting the leading edge registra Registration clutch turning on timing U034 LSU OUT TOP U034 test pattern P 1 3 18 tion printing adjustment secondary paper feed start timing a Adjusting the leading edge margin LSU illumination start timing U402 LESD U402 test pattern P 1 3 65 fies 7 printing adjustment F Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test pattern P 1 3 65 To make an adjustment for duplex copying select printing adjustment TRAIL DUP TRAIL DUP x TRAIL MP To make an adjustment for MP tray select TRAIL MP Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start end timing U402 JA U402 test pattern P 1 3 65 printing adjustment C e HI Adjusting magnification of the Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN ADJ Test chart P 1 3 23 scanner in the main scanning d
221. n 500K 40 50 when user call occurs Section Maintenance cycle Points and cautions 2 4 4 Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle 2GN 2GP 2GR Points and cautions Main charg ing drum section Section Drum unit Main charger unit Drum separation claw Maintenance part location Replace Clean Check or replace Method 400K 30 500K 40 50 User call User call Maintenance cycle Replace Check and replace when user call occurs Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth Replace if the leading edge of the claws are damaged Points and cautions Fuser section Section Fuser unit Heat roller Heat roller separation claw Press roller Press roller separation claw Maintenance part location Replace Check or replace Clean Check or replace Clean Method 400K 30 500K 40 50 User call 400K 30 500K 40 50 User call 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance cycle Replace Check and replace when user call occurs Check and replace when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and replace when user call occurs Check and replace when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and replace when user call occurs Points and cautions Eject section Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchbac
222. n charger housing The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Defective engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB See page 1 4 45 8 No developing bias is output The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Defective engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB See page 1 4 45 9 Transfer charging is not performed The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Defective engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB See page 1 4 45 10 The original size is not detected cor rectly Original is not placed cor rectly Check the original and correct if necessary Poor contact in the origi nal detection switch or original size detection sensor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective original detec tion switch If the level of YC4 5 on the scanner PWB does not go low when the original detection switch is turned on and off replace the origi nal detection switch Defective original size detection sensor Check if sensor operates correctly If not replace it 1 4 52 Problem Causes 2GN 2GP 2GR Check procedures corrective measures 11 The touch panel keys do not work Poor contact in the
223. n leading edge timing center line GAMMA Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 303JX57010 for tolerance of input gamma MTF MATRIX Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 303JX57020 for tolerance of MTF filter and matrix ALL 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 executing maintenance item U425 2 Set specified originals P N 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 in the DP Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241 303JX57010 and 303JX57020 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts INPUT 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 2AC68241 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 2AC24681 in the DP 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts GAMMA 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 303JX57010 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 303JX57010 in the DP 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts MTF MATRIX 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 303JX57020 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 303JX57020 in the DP 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance aes item No Description U411 When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is
224. n on within specified time of the paper path sensor 2 PPSENS2 turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 539 ms 30 ppm 417 ms 40 50 ppm 1 4 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Paper 18 The registration switch RSW does not turn on within 1657 ms 30 ppm feed Misfeed in vertical specified time of feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on 1283 ms 40 50 ppm section or pee Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within specified 1910 ms 30 ppm time of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on 1478 ms 40 50 ppm Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within specified 1904 ms 30 ppm time of feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on 1474 ms 40 50 ppm 19 Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within specified 1573 ms 30 ppm Misfeed in paper feeder time of the paper feeder feed switch PFFSW turning on 1217 ms 40 50 ppm 1 4 4 vertical paper convey ing section 20 Misfeed in MP tray ver tical paper conveying section The registration switch RSW does not turn on within specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning on 3933 ms 30 ppm 3043 ms 40 50 ppm 21 Multiple sheets in paper feed section The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on Paper length 4337ms 30 ppm Paper length 3357ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci fied time of its tu
225. n the Flash ROM on the fax con trol PWB Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation Fax control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer problem optional fax High capacity data transfer between the fax control PWB and the main PWB was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC1 on the fax control PWB and YC4 on the inter face PWB connection of connector YC30 on the main PWB and YC6 on the interface PWB and the continuity across the connec tor terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective fax con trol PWB or main PWB Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation Fax control PWB program archive problem optional fax When power is turned on the com pressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not success fully decompressed Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation Fax file system error optional fax The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PWB Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Upper lift motor error When cass
226. nance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U244 Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional DP Purpose To check if respective switches in the optional DP operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Switches DP lift upper limit switch DPLULSW DP lift lower limit switch DPLLLSW Original set switch OSSW Original size length switch OLSW Original feed switch OFSW Original registration switch ORSW Display LIFT LOW LIM SW LIFT UP LIM SW DP SET SW DP PSD SW DP FEED SW DP REG SW CCD TMING SW CIS TMING SW DP COVER SW DP OPEN SW DP timing switch 1 DP timing switch 2 DP safety switch 2 DP safety switch 1 DPTSW1 DPTSW2 DPSSW2 DPSSW1 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel Purpose To check the messages to be displayed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be displayed 3 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys to display each message one at a time When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the mes sage cor
227. ncels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location Purpose According to user request sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets Initial setting ON Details of restriction number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed Condition Number of sheets When no optional ejection device is installed 250 When the job separator is installed 150 When the finisher is installed 100 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy Purpose To be set according to frequency of use set to the more frequently used mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Duplex copy OFF Simplex copy Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 64 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that t
228. ner main scanning direction magnification Black band is not detected scanner leading edge registration Black band is not detected scanner main scanning direction magnification Black band is not detected scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction magnification far end Black band is not detected scanner center line Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction magnification near end Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge original check Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge 2 DMA time out Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge detection error Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge detection error Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1 5 error Maintenance request error Main scanning direction center line error Main scanning direction skew 1 5 error Main scanning direction magnification error Carriage error Service call error DP status error DP open error Original is not detected N950 patch for the original error N850 patch for the original error N770 patch for the original error N650 patch for the original error N500 patch for
229. nnector Parallel interface connector Option interface slot OPT1 Option interface slot OPT2 USB memory slot A1 Green knob A1 Paper feed unit A2 Paper feed unit cover A2 2 Operation panel 4 2GN 2GP 2GR System Menu Counter SS di a F Help Logout C ae Som C Se Copy cs ea DOGO OH Program Send 4 6 Stop sE Call al a Application Document Box 7 9 d ce eel Aaka ooo VJ 87 6 19 20 21 22 23 Figure 1 1 2 1 System menu key indicator 13 Memory indicator 2 Status Job cancel key indicator 14 Error indicator 3 Program key indicator 15 Help key indicator 4 Application key 16 Log out key indicator 5 Counter key indicator 17 Power key 6 Copy key indicator 18 Main power indicator 7 Send key indicator 19 Numeric keys 8 Document box key indicator 20 Clear key 9 Accessibility key indicator 21 Start key indicator 10 Print indicator 22 Stop key 11 Transmission indicator 23 Reset key 12 Reception indicator 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 1 3 Machine cross section
230. not displayed Clearing 1 Select the count to be cleared To clear all counts press the clear key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the punch hole scrap counter Description To set the punch limit display and clear the punch counter of optional 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To set the maximum number of punches possible in order to instruct the user of the time to replace punch waste Also used to manually clear the punch hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch hole scrap is shown on the touch panel after collection If punch hole scrap is collected with the machine power turned off the punch hole scrap count is not cleared and consequently this problem occurs Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description Setting range Initial setting PUNCH LIMIT The maximum number of punches 0 to 999000 35000 maximum number of punching times PUNCH COUNT Punch hole scrap count 0 to 999999 current number of punching times 3 Change the setting using the numeric keys or clear key 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 75 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U903 Checking clearing the paper jam c
231. nstall the filter Filter cover Figure 1 5 72 1 5 35 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the dust filter 1 and 2 Procedure 1 Open the MP tray 2 Remove the dust filter 1 and 2 from the machine 3 Replace the dust filter 1 and 2 and install the filter H Dust filter 1 Dust filter 2 Figure 1 5 73 1 5 36 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware 2GN 2GP 2GR Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB engine PWB scanner PWB and MMI Firmware upgrading requires the following tools Compact Flash Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended or USB memory NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer be sure to format it in advance Procedure 1 Press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Insert Compact Flash or USB memory ina notch hole of the machine The Compact Flash must be inserted into the machine with its rear side facing up Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on Upgrading firmware starts for 9 minutes Caution Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading Completed is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complet
232. ol Elele leleoa han Ea a eo ee ae 2 lealesles msoaana gt 89 salsa D S ost 9a 98 2 o O 6 s er S f gt 9 Li dt t a arfor e 2 St st Q w r T y Q et ve Li W z E VNS A z a ra Q aws I E 9 VNS z pa EA r 1 oh er o a nS D zZ otf or s IB Hee E Oo E AE e o g ra y rz za sz GNOS Si Ee z ENa l ww vz anos o e si er z a Ez Ave S 2 2 ufu c zz Ave Lel 4 a STs E tz Avz 8 iji e 02 Ace q l oaas e s s e 5 9 6E AS sv SV eje 81 1asaa ane z z Tas ov ev TT T Z 7asaa NIN HAAPE m 31 anada MEEST IE Sr anoa ano ev 6v rs D EH anes m Oivforw oO gt EL GNOS glseni kly tY s ajora f m wn zt anos ae srafsra 2 anos rialria OF azt a eralere 6 Ave zigjzig B 8 Ace 2 x T wajita iy Z as j ejz ras ziz u A gt j 3 oasaa gjoj2 el i cz ae He ES EN Z g osaa z t z ce ae Siv siv 2 Y Aguda ryryic irae tar Fd S onida Eis E a piv piv WIS z ansa zie Z ety ety el is T aNod eje gt A z t jam w t c D v iv gt 7 ZIOSSI aq re 9 x TOSSI Lile maA D FIF eSl4d LSLl4 Udart o e t o HH Grosos ste ov ow y z i le Z zz fiasos 2 z WHJ Sv Sv mss gs a 5 ze ae as 4 me n j EE SHI wf INS o z i O 5 ots o ev ev kalii m 8 asos 3 sv ev ange r 6 ul gt ii NUIOS Orv ory E z g g N S L jtt 35 LAS zZ lw SIS 13S z et wel T w sblh Hs co Folic ola o id m 8 p 2a RRIS
233. ol PWB remains low or high when the intermediate tray sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the intermediate tray sensor 1 4 21 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 4 2 Self diagnosis 1 Self diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self diagnostic function When a problem is detected copying is disabled and the problem dis played as a code consisting of C followed by a number indicating the nature of the problem A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service After removing the problem the self diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back on List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason a system error will be indicated After a system error is indicated the error can be cleared by turning the main power switch off and then on If the error is detected continuously however perform the operation shown in Table 1 4 1 If a system error occurs frequently a fault may have occurred Check the details of the C call to take proper measures System error Contents Operation 0800 Image processing problem System error gt Normal service call processing 1800 Paper feeder unit communication problem System error service call gt partial operation 4200 BD steady state problem System error gt Normal service call processing 8800 Document finisher communication problem System error service call gt partial operation 90
234. om of the machine to optimize levelness Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames 1 Turn the lever of the machine rear side with the tool to release the lever holding the mir ror 1 and 2 frames Figure 1 2 5 1 2 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Release of cassette lift plate 1 Pull cassette 1 and 2 out Remove the lift plate stopper from each cas sette and attach it to the storage location When moving the machine attach the lift plate in original position Load paper Pull the cassette out 2 Holding the paper width adjusting tab both ends move the paper width guides to fit the paper e 3 Adjust the length adjustment plate to fit the paper size 1 2 6 Lift plate stopper 2 fh UW l TT Figure 1 2 6 C Ze T Paper width guides Paper width adjusting tab Length adjustment plate Figure 1 2 8 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette Figure 1 2 9 Install the toner container 1 Open the front cover 2 Tap the top of the toner container five to six times Toner container Figure 1 2 10 3 Shake the toner container approximately 10 Toner container times in the horizontal direction to stir toner Figure 1 2 11 1 2 7 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Gently push the toner container into the machine along the rails Push the container
235. on Always wash hands afterwards Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire MEA TUPM ACES CTC eects Shaved iets casi a R lode land cules a dl das etitau ave E aia valgudeeduaasves S Should smoke be seen coming from the copier remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme VALS P LEE N ELENE N EEA NE E NEE EE OET Z 3 Miscellaneous A WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol other than the specified refiner it may generate tOXIC GAS eeeececcecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees S 2GN 2GP 2GR CONTENTS 1 1 Specifications SPeCiiGatiOns EPE cteatcaiae eels eta E E sung lecestadssesisenntearasescseunees 1 1 1 tad 2 Parts NaMesss cect cot aiendtiits aie Nite eo eS ieee ee a wie a eel ee ee a 1 1 4 heMacCnine sin cceieriut tee ena hiaeh alee etd Ra A i a 1 1 4 2 lt Operation pae 2 ceeteeta ch aie at ase Ret ced eta Sot oe ee a 1 1 5 1 1 3 Machine cross Section ect aki fav an eek a eee i el ee ee SO 1 1 6 1 2 Installation 1221 Installation environment aaa sees ai aien a eaei aa taa aena aaia 1 2 1 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation Ainin a a a a a de ee th 1 2 2 C Installation procedure wiz isisa de an tee thee a a eae 1 2 2 2 Setting initial copy MOdeS iis csee ek deve ete estes cies av eben a ieeetl en a eaer 1 2 10 1 2 3 Installing the key Counter Option
236. on Purpose To try USB activation functions Method Press the start key Display Description FUNCTION Selecting trial functions TRIAL STATUS Displays the current setting 1 Under trial 0 Not trial COUPON COUNT Displays remaining times TIME LIMIT Displays the end term of the function under present trial TRIAL START Starts the trial of the function selected with FUNCTION TRIAL STOP Stops the trial of the function selected with FUNCTION Setting FUNCTION 1 Select FUNCTION 2 Select the function using the keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set COUPON COUNT TIME LIMIT TRIAL START and TRIAL STOP are displayed Method TRIAL START 1 Select TRIAL STRAT 2 Press the start key Trial of the function selected with FUNCTION is started The display of COUPON COUNT decreases one The display of TIME LIMIT will be the date of the present date plus 30 days Method TRIAL STOP 1 Select TRIAL STOP 2 Press the start key Trial of the function selected with FUNCTION is stopped Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U234_ Setting punch destination Description Sets the destination of optional punch unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description AUTO With no punch unit
237. on Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 1 3 21 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U061 Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on Purpose To check the exposure lamp Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description CCD Exposure lamp CIS CIS optional DP exposure lamp 3 Press the start key The selected lamp lights 4 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 22 Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position of the scanner Purpose Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate To prevent this problem the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Shading position 12 to 18 0 0 11 mm Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine left 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance
238. on data is dis played Display Description ORIGINAL AREA R Detected original width size R ORIGINAL AREA G Detected original width size G ORIGINAL AREA B Detected original width size B ORIGINAL AREA Detected original width size SIZE SW L Displays the original detection switch ON OFF 2 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting 1 Select an item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting ORIGINAL R Original threshold value R 0 to 255 105 ORIGINAL G Original threshold value G 0 to 255 105 ORIGINAL B Original threshold value B 0 to 255 105 LIGHT SOURCE R Light source threshold value R 0 to 255 60 LIGHT SOURCE G Light source threshold value G 0 to 255 60 LIGHT SOURCE B Light source threshold value B 0 to 255 60 WAIT TIME Time from activation of the original detection switch 0 to 255 ODSW to original size judgment A4R AREA Original size detection position display mm 220 240 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 37 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U100 Setting the main high voltage Description Performs main charging Purpose To check main charging Method 1
239. on data signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Paper feeder READY signal Paper feeder FEED signal Connected to the MP unit waste toner box detection switch over flow sensor front cover switch and cooling fan motor 1 2 2 3 6 MPPWSWO MPPWSW1 MPPWSW2 GND 5VD MPPSW GND 24VDR MPPFCL 24VDR MPFCL NC GND CFM2 5VD O 0O0 000 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 5VDC MPPWSW On Off MPPWSW On Off MPPWSW On Off Ground 5 V DC power output MPPSW On Off Ground 24 V DC power output MPPFCL On Off 24 V DC power output MPFCL On Off Not used Ground CFM2 On Off 5 V DC power output Connector Signal Voltage 2GN 2GP 2GR Description YC6 Connected to the MP unit waste toner box detection switch over flow sensor front cover switch and cooling fan motor 1 2 WTDSW GND OFS GND FRCSW GND CFM1 GND 5VD MPPLSW GND 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC WTDSW On Off Ground OFS On Off Ground FRCSW On Off Ground CFM1 On Off Ground 5 V DC power output MPPLSW On Off Ground Connected to the high voltage PWB BVSEL1 24VDR GND MHVDR HVCLK RHVDR RISEL TICTL BVSEL2 THVDR NC NC NC NC O O oo0o0o0000O Oto5VDC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0to5VDC Oto5VDC Oto5VDC 0 5 V DC
240. on the image Copy example Causes Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly If not replace the exposure lamp see page 1 5 11 Check procedures corrective measures Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty drum separation claws Clean the drum separation claws Dirty the heat roller separation claws Clean the heat roller separation claws 1 4 47 2GN 2GP 2GR 10 Image is blurred Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Scanner moves erratically Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails If any remove it Deformed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 30 Paper conveying section drive prob lem Check the gears and belts and if necessary grease them 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted leading edge registration Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge registration see page 1 3 18 Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner lead
241. opying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 32 Setting the economy mode Description Sets the level in the economy mode Purpose To increase or decrease the image density in the eco print mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ADJUST DATA Description Setting range Initial setting Exposure is toner economy mode 12 to 0 6 3 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes the image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter 4 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position If dust is identified the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals Purpose When using optional DP to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position Method
242. or 1 2 SRM1 2 is turned on Staple shift motor 1 STSM1 is turned on Staple shift motor 2 STSM2 is turned on Staple motor STM is turned on Main tray motor MTM is turned on Punch motor PUNM is turned on Paddle motor PDM is turned on 2 To stop operation press the stop key 1 3 49 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U240 1 3 50 Method Checking the solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher 1 Select the item to be operated The solenoid turns on for 1 s Display Solenoid FEED IN SOL REAR DOWN SOL 1 REAR DOWN SOL 2 SUB PATH SOL SUB TRAY R SOL SUB TRAY L SOL BOOKLET SOL PADDLE SOL HOLD DOWN SOL EJECT SOL PUNCH SOL M TRAY LOCK SOL Paper entry solenoid PESOL Trailing edge holder solenoid 1 TEHSOL1 Trailing edge holder solenoid 2 TEHSOL2 Relief path solenoid RPSOL Feedshift solenoid 1 FSSOL1 Feedshift solenoid 2 FSSOL2 Feedshift solenoid 3 FSSOL3 Paddle solenoid PDSOL Paper holder solenoid PHSOL Pressure switching solenoid PSWSOL Punch pattern solenoid PPSOL Lock solenoid LSOL Method Checking the motor and solenoid of the mail box 1 Select the item to be operated The operation starts Display Motors and solenoids FEED IN MOTOR BRANCH SOL 2 BRANCH SOL 3 BRANCH SOL 4 BRANCH SOL 5 BRANCH SOL 6 BRANCH SOL 7 FEED IN SOL Mail box drive motor MBDM Tray feedshift solenoid 1 TFSSOL1 Tray f
243. orrective measures Operation panel PWB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective opera tion panel PWB Replace the operation panel PWB and check for correct operation Main PWB checksum error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Memory checksum error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective expan sion memory Replace the expansion memory and check for correct operation Main PWB system error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Engine PWB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Scanner PWB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Engine ROM checksum error Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Engine RAM error Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Flash ROM error Defective flash ROM Replace the flash ROM and check for cor rect operation Flash ROM error during downlo
244. otor Main charger cleaning motor error A locking error has been detected three times in a row during a reciprocating cleaning motion Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC9 on the engine PWB and the connector on the main charger cleaning motor and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective main charger cleaning motor Replace the main charger cleaning motor 1 4 28 Paper feed motor error Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu ously after paper feed motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC11 on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feed motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective paper feed motor Replace the paper feed motor Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR
245. ount value machine number and the developing counter Method Press the start key Past record of 5 cases is displayed Display Description MACHINE No 1 to 5 Past record of machine number COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of developing counter Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U989 HDD scandisk Description Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged Use this mode to restore the data Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key When scanning of the disk is complete the execution result is displayed 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replace ment Method Press the start key The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes Display Description CCD Accumulated time for the exposure lamp CIS Accumulated time for
246. ounts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations Purpose To check the paper jam status Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description COUNT Displays clears the jam counts TOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts Method Displays clears the jam counts 1 Select COUNT The count for jam detection by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the counts for all jam codes and press the clear key 4 Press the start key The count is cleared The individual counter cannot be cleared 5 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Method Displays the total jam counts 1 Select TOTAL COUNT The total number of jam counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of jam count cannot be cleared 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 76 Checking clearing the service call counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types Purpose To check the service call code status by types Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing con sumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The sc
247. ove four screws and remove the front right cover Front right cover Figure 1 5 42 4 Remove three screws and remove the top tray Figure 1 5 43 5 Remove five screws and remove the inner cover Inner cover Figure 1 5 44 1 5 21 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Remove two screws and two connectors and then remove the fan duct Fan duct Connectors Figure 1 5 45 N Remove six screws and remove the toner container retainer Toner container retainer Figure 1 5 46 8 Remove four screws and the connector and then remove the laser scanner unit 9 Replace the laser scanner unit and install the unit 10 Refit the toner container retainer fan duct and inner cover 11 Refit the top tray front right cover right lower cover and front left cover 12 Refit the drum unit and the developing unit Connector Laser scanner unit Figure 1 5 47 1 5 22 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral square ness not obtained Enter maintenance mode Procedure Correct image Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Enter 993 using the numeric keys y Figure 1 5 48 Press the start key Refit the laser scanner unit and turn the main power switch on Select PG2 Press the system menu key Press t
248. ower cable where it may be stood on or trapped If necessary protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item eee ceecceeeeecseeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeeseaas S Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks 0O Remove toner completely from electronic COomMponents 00 0 2 cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaees A Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged ssssessssssseerrrssressn Q After maintenance always check that all the parts screws connectors and wires that were removed have been refitted correctly Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector trapped wire ANd MISSING SCOWS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee eee eee eeeee eee eeeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Q Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below ssesssssssssssssrrnnnee Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch
249. pecified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 1573 ms 30 ppm 1217 ms 40 50 ppm Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is con veyed to the intermediate tray from the paper conveying unit Paper length 1123 ms 30 ppm Paper length 869 ms 40 50 ppm 82 Jam in stapler 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected within the specified time when driving the staple motor 600 ms Document finisher The staple home position sensor STSPS is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor STM 1000 ms Built in finisher The staple home position sensor STHPS is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor STM 600 ms 1 4 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional 83 3000 sheet document finisher 1182 ms finisher Exit sensor stay jam Eject switch 1 ESW1 is not turned off within specified time of its turning on Document finisher 1680ms In the straight mode the exit sensor EXS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on Document finisher 5375ms In the offset or staple mode the exit sensor EXS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within spec
250. ple 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value tit Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 12 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U070 U071 U404 jaro P 1 3 28 P 1 3 67 Adjustment auxiliary scanning direction of CCD CIS 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 13 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U070 U071 U404 uoo P 1 3 28 P 1 3 67 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 27 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjus
251. r 2GN 2GP 2GR e NO 10 Figure 2 1 10 Laser scanner unit 2 Laser diode Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum Collimator lens Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam Cylindrical lens Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution Polygon mirror Nine facet mirror that rotates with each face reflecting the laser beam toward the drum for one main direction scan fO lens Corrects for non linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface keeps the beam diame ter constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam is on the drum surface Mirror Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction Mirror Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction BD sensor mirror Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main direction horizontal sync sig nal Cylindrical correcting lens Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror to the BD sensor BD sensor Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror outputting a signal to the main PWB MPWB to provide timing for the main direction sync signal 2GN 2GP 2GR The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2 1 11 Less than 100 um Less than 85 um Figure 2 1 11 Scann
252. r main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 33 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper conveying belt motor 1 prob lem optional 3000 sheet document finisher Paper conveying belt home position sen sor 1 does not turn off within 1 5 s Paper conveying belt home position sen sor 1 does not turn on within 2 5 s Jam 88 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC2 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on paper conveying belt motor 1 and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper conveying belt home position sen sor 1 Replace paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 Defective paper conveying belt motor 1 Replace paper conveying belt motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Paper conveying belt motor 2 prob lem optional 3000 sheet document finisher Paper conveying belt home position sen sor 2 does not turn off within 1 5 s Paper conveying belt home position sen sor 2 does not turn on within 2 5 s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on paper conveying belt motor 2 and the conti nuity across the connector terminals
253. r 1 and 2 ssesssessesssieeerreriessirssrirrrirrsrinnstinnnirnnnrnnntnnnennnnnnn 1 5 35 2 Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2 0 eee eeeenee rennet eeeeeeeeaeeeteaeeeeeaaeeeeeaeesenaeeeeeneeeees 1 5 36 1 6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmwares as eve eck ai een cen hese tetany aaa t eo Av a ease 1 6 1 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR ceesceeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeessaaeesenaeeeseaeesesaeeeseaeeeeeaeeenneeeenaeees 1 6 2 1 6 3 Remarks on main PWB replaceMent eeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaaeeseaeeeeeaeetesaeeesneeseseaeeseesenaeees 1 6 2 1 6 4 Remarks on scanner PWB replacement eecceeseeeesneeteeaeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeesenaeessaaeeseeeeeeneeeseenseeeees 1 6 2 2 1 Mechanical construction 2 1 1 Paper feed SOCtION a A e a sheet a Ae aa hes ta aastgevsnd a a a E A a aA aa a a E 2 1 1 2 1 2 Main charging SEctioN riviin aar i r ne A ax eee eee e eed ele 2 1 4 PAEO eE Te ola EEEE EA A A A E E A 2 1 5 M Original SCANNING sesan ei en Bev SEA eos sae eat een dati ieee eee ds 2 1 6 2 MAGS PMMA a a a a a E aa a a Ea a an a o cs E scangevaey tees iaa 2 1 7 2 1 4 Developing Sector siia eee ag a cher seed shee ates eit ie nie A aE eee area tes 2 1 10 1 Single component developing SYStOM eecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeseeesnaeetieeseeeeeaeee 2 1 12 2 1 5 Transfer and separation SOCTtIONS cceseceeseseeesenc
254. r detection sensor 2 PDS2 Paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 PCBHPS1 Paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 PCBHPS2 Side registration home position sensor 1 GRHPS1 Side registration home position sensor 2 SRHPS2 Paper conveying belt position detection sensor PCBDS Centerfold paper conveying sensor CPCS 1 3 51 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U241 Method Checking the switch of the mail box 1 Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches FEED IN SW EJECT SW COVER SW OVER FLOW SW 1 OVER FLOW SW 2 OVER FLOW SW 3 OVER FLOW SW 4 OVER FLOW SW 5 OVER FLOW SW 6 OVER FLOW SW 7 Mail paper entry switch MPESW Tray eject sensor TEJS Mail box cover open close switch MBCOSW Tray overflow switch 1 TOFSW1 Tray overflow switch 2 TOFSW2 Tray overflow switch 3 TOFSW3 Tray overflow switch 4 TOFSW4 Tray overflow switch 5 TOFSW5 Tray overflow switch 6 TOFSW6 Tray overflow switch 7 TOFSW7 Method Checking the switch of the centerfold unit 1 Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches BUNDLE UP HP SW BNDL DOWN HP SW BLADE HP SW WIDTH HP
255. r or replace if necessary Defective drum unit Replace the drum unit Developing unit EEPROM error Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective develop ing unit Replace the developing unit Punch motor problem optional 3000 sheet document finisher The LOCK signal of the punch motor is detected for more than 500 ms while the punch motor is operating Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the punch PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective punch motor Replace the punch motor Defective PWB Replace the punch PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Tray upper limit detection problem optional document finisher When the tray elevation motor raises a tray the ON status of the tray upper limit sensor is detected The tray upper limit sensor push paper sensor surface view sensor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective tray upper limit sensor push paper sensor surface view sen sor Replace the sensor Defective finishe
256. r replace the cable Defective rear side registration motor Replace rear side registration motor The rear side reg istration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective rear side registration home position sensor Replace the rear side registration home position sensor Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Finisher trailing edge registration motor problem optional built in fin isher When the trailing edge registration home position sensor is turned on during initialization the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses When the trailing edge registration home position sensor is turned off during initialization the sensor did not turn on in three seconds The trailing edge registration motor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective trailing edge registration motor Replace trailing edge registration motor The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective trailing edge registration
257. rames to the machine left and insert the two frame secur ing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the frames in position Hold the wires and fix each front and rear wire holder plate to mirror 1 frame with the screw Remove the two frame securing tools Refit the exposure lamp 2GN 2GP 2GR Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Frame securing tool Mirror 1 frame Figure 1 5 36 1 5 17 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU Fitting requires the following tools Two positions pins P N 1856812 Procedure Detaching the ISU ISU cover 1 Remove the platen see page 1 5 11 2 Remove seven screws and then remove the ISU cover Figure 1 5 37 3 Remove three screws and two connectors Cohnect i and then remove the ISU 4 Replace the ISU Connector Figure 1 5 38 1 5 18 2GN 2GP 2GR Fitting the ISU 5 Adjust the position of ISU to the frame hole of number and the same number which are recorded in the lens of ISU and then insert two positioning pins Example When a lens number is 5 move ISU so that the positioning hole of 5 of the number stamped in the scanner unit suit and insert two pins 6 Remove two positioning pins after fixing ISU with three screws 7 Refit two connectors and ISU cover 8 Refit the platen Lens number Figure 1 5 39 1 5 19 2GN
258. rates MFP DP Both the machine and DP operate continuous operation Press the start key Press the system menu key The copy mode screen is displayed Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen Changes in the following settings can be made Paper feed locations Magnifications Simplex or duplex copy mode Number of copies in simplex copy mode continuous copying is performed when set to 999 in duplex copy mode continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting Copy density Keys on the operation panel To control the paper feed pulley remove all the paper in the drawers or the drawers With the paper present the paper feed pulley does not operate Press the start key The operation starts Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions To stop continuous operation press the stop key 8 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U019 Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB Purpose To check the part number or to decide if the newest version of ROM is installed Method Press the start key The ROM version are displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 1 Display Description MAIN MMI
259. ration press the stop key Method HOME POSITION 1 Select HOME POSITION 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position Method DP READING 1 Select DP READING 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position Method DUST CHECK 1 Select DUST CHECK 2 Press the start key The exposure lamp lights 3 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop key Completion Press the stop key when scanning stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 31 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and when scanning an original from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description Setting Initial range setting R DP input light luminosity of R image 12 to 12 0 G DP input light luminosity of G image 12 to 12 0 B DP input light luminosity of B image 12 to 12 0 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower 4 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed c
260. ration pulley is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 4 Electrical problem with the following clutches upper lower paper feed clutches feed clutches 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch See page 1 4 51 2 No secondary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the right and left reg istration rollers are dirty with paper powder Clean with isopropyl alcohol Electrical problem with the registration clutch See page 1 4 51 3 Skewed paper feed Width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary Deformed width guide in a cassette Check visually and replace any deformed guide Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place Repair or replace 4 The scanner does not travel Check if the scanner wire is loose Reinstall the scanner wire see page 1 5 13 The scanner motor malfunctions See page 1 4 51 5 Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the upper or lower separation pulley is worn Replace the upper or lower separation pul ley if itis worn See page 1 5 2 Check if the MP separation pulley is worn Replace the MP separation pulley if it is worn see page 1 5 4 1 4 55 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures
261. rature is detected by the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 FTH1 2 and is regulated by the fuser heaters turning on and off If the fuser section becomes abnormally hot fuser unit thermostat 1 and 2 FTS1 2 operates shutting the power to the fuser heaters off When the fusing process is completed the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is conveyed from the machine to eject and switchback section Upper fuser unit cover Fuser housing Heat roller Heat roller separation claw Fuser heater M FH M Fuser heater S FH S Fuser unit thermostat 1 FTS1 Fuser unit thermostat 2 FTS2 Fuser unit thermistor 1 FTH1 Fuser unit thermistor 2 FTH2 Press roller Press roller separation claw eS lt 0O 0ONOCORAROUON MP oVwvrvrvrvrvrvrvr rwr eS es ES EE es es oOo qT oO O gt YC10 A10 Figure 2 1 22 Fuser section block diagram 2 1 15 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 8 Eject and switchback sections The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fixing has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the eject motor In duplex copying paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor When paper is transferred to the job separa tor or the internal finisher the feedshift solenoid FSSOL is turned on to activate the feedshift guide to switch the paper transfer path
262. rd disk using maintenance item U024 and execute initialization using maintenance item U002 For other errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U002 1 3 11 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U003 Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine Method Press the start key The currently set telephone number is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel 2 Press TEL NO on the touch panel 3 Enter a telephone number up to 15 digits 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Displaying the machine number Description Displays the machine number Purpose To check the machine number Method Press the start key The currently machine number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 12 Copying without paper Description Simulates the copy operation without paper feed Purpose To check the overall operation of the machine Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated Display Operation MFP Only the machine ope
263. rd or key counter Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description KEY DEVICE Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter MESSAGE Sets the message when optional equipment is not installed Setting KEY DEVICE 1 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON The key card or the key counter is installed OFF Not installed 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Setting MESSAGE 1 Select the COUNTER CARD or COIN 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 45 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender Also sets the details for coin vender operation such as mode and unit price This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel Method
264. re 2 1 25 Duplex section EPWB DUPPCSW YC10 B4 DUPFCL E YC10 B2 Figure 2 1 26 Duplex section block diagram 2 1 17 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex copying Paper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section the eject motor switches from normal rotation to reverse rotation to switch the eject roller to reverse rotation and the paper conveying direction is reversed Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex section via the eject roller and the switchback roller Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex section is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper duplex feed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front side is performed Eject roller Switchback roller Eject roller Eject roller F Qe VO LAO We ORCA NZ ONVAIS le Upper duplex feed roller
265. reen for executing is displayed Display Description COUNT Displays clears the service call counts TOTAL COUNT Displays the total service call counts Method Displays clears the service call counts 1 Select COUNT The count for service call detection by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the counts for all service call codes and press the clear key 4 Press the start key The count is cleared The individual counter cannot be cleared 5 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Method Displays the total service call counts 1 Select TOTAL COUNT The total number of service call counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of service call count cannot be cleared 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U905_ Checking clearing counts by optional devices Description Displays or clears the counts of optional DP or finisher Purpose To check the use of optional DP and finisher Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the device the count of which is to be checked The count of the selected device is displayed Display Description DP Counts of optional D
266. responding the specified number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 53 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U246 1 3 54 Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the optional finisher if furnished Purpose Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z folded in punch mode Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one Adjustment of front rear side registration home position of internal tray Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the internal tray adjuster guides to paper Adjusting of front and back slanted stapling home position Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper Provides adjustment of slanted stapling Adjustment of upper lower side registration home position of centerfold unit Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the centerfold adjuster guides to paper Adjustment of booklet stapling position Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Adjustment of center folding position Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Start 1 Press the start key 2
267. rning on Paper length 4337ms 30 ppm Paper length 3357ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional paper feeder 3382ms 30 ppm 2617ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper length 1595ms 30 ppm Paper length 1234ms 40 50 ppm The paper feeder feed switch PFFSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 3382ms 30 ppm 2617ms 40 50 ppm The MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on Paper length 4337ms 30 ppm Paper length 3357ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of the upper paper feed clutch PFCL U turning on 1489 ms 30 ppm 1152 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci fied time of the lower paper feed clutch PFCL L turning on 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of the paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on 3416 ms 30 ppm 2643 ms 40 50 ppm The paper feeder feed switch PFFSW does not turn off within specified time of the paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 turning on 5056 ms 30 ppm 3913 ms 40 50 ppm The
268. rum quality 256 LEVEL To check resolution reproducibility in printing 1 dot LINE To check fine line reproducibility To adjust the position of the laser scanner unit lateral squareness To change the output conditions of MONO LEVEL and 1dot LINE use the or numeric keys to change the preset values and press the start key to register the setting Description Setting Initial range setting Output density of MONO LEVEL 0 to 255 0 1dot LINE 0 to 21 0 4 Press the system menu key 5 Press the start key A MIP PG pattern is output 6 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 34 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U093 Setting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode depending on respective image quality modes Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respec tive image quality modes Also used to make copy images darker or lighter Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the image quality mode The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description MIXED Density in text and photo mode TEXT Density in text mode PHOTO Density in photo mode
269. shes 2 Press on the center of the key The key on lower right flashes 3 Press the center of the flashing key Initialization of the touch panel is complete and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 44 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP Purpose To check the DP operation Method 1 Press the start key 2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper 3 Select the item to be operated 4 When selecting TEST2 to set the magnification using the keys Display Operation Setting range Initial setting TEST 1 NON P Without paper TEST 2 With paper 100 to 200 5 Press the start key The operation starts 6 To stop continuous operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key ca
270. square 18 lmage center does not align with the original center 17 lmage is out of focus See page 1 4 49 See page 1 4 50 See page 1 4 50 1 No image appears entirely white 2GN 2GP 2GR Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures No trans fer charg ing The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 10 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 5 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB No LSU laser is output Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 21 Defective main PWB Check if YC21 A3 on the main PWB goes low when mainte nance item U100 is run If not replace the main PWB No devel oping bias output The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 1 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run
271. ssary Paper feeder lift motor 2 error optional 3000 sheet paper feeder A motor over current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Paper feeder lift motor 2 does not rotate correctly the motor is over loaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feeder left lift position problem optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper feeder switch 2 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper feeder lift switch 2 Check if YC5 7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift switch 2 Defective paper feeder lift motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 1 The paper feeder left lift does not rise properly Check the gears and belts and remedy if necessary Paper
272. stapler is bro ken Replace the stapler and check for correct operation Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Finisher stapler problem optional built in finisher The stapler home position sensor does not change state from nondetection to detection within 200 ms of the start of stapler motor counterclockwise forward rotation During initialization the stapler home position sensor does not change state from non detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of stapler motor clockwise reverse rotation The stapler con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The stapler is blocked with a sta ple Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the sta pler The stapler is bro ken Replace the front stapler and check for cor rect operation Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Stapler moving motor 2 error optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 5 s passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the finisher main PWB and the connector o
273. start key The value is set Adjustment auxiliary scanning direction 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 9 5 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 23 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U066 1 3 24 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA 1 Scanner leading edge registration 45 to 45 0 0 11 mm ADJUST DATA2 Scanner leading edge registration 45 to 45 0 0 10 mm rotate copying Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the va
274. stration motor 2 and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold side registra tion motor 2 Replace centerfold side registration motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Centerfold main motor problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The motor lock signal is detected above 1000 ms during driving the centerfold main motor Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC12 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the centerfold main motor and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold main motor Replace the centerfold main motor Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Sensor adjusting problem optional document finisher The sensor cannot be adjusted within the specified range The paper entry sensor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective paper entry sensor Replace the paper entry sensor and check for correct operation The optical path of the paper entry sensor is blocked by foreign matter Remove the foreign matter Defective
275. t Set the original the one which density is known in the DP and press the system menu key The screen for the test copy mode is displayed Press the start key Test copy is executed 0 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 4 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 26 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction or auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step CIS MAIN ADJ Magnification in the main scanning 25 to 25 0 0 1 direction of CIS CONVEY SPEED Magnification in the auxiliary scan 25 to 25 0 1 ning direction of CCD CIS SUB ADJ Magnification in the auxiliary scan 15 to 10 0 05 ning direction of CIS Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U070 Adjustment main scanning direction of CIS 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy exam
276. t If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U403 U072 U404 P 1 3 66 P 1 3 30 P 1 3 67 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 25 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP Performs the test copy at the five scanning positions after adjusting Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed Setting 1 Press the start key Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA Starting position adjustment for 55 to 55 0 0 11 mm scanning originals TEST POSITION Scanning position for the test copy 0to3 0 71 mm originals Select ADJUST DATA of the screen for selecting an item Change the setting using the or numeric keys When the setting value is increased the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased Press the start key The value is set Select TEST POSITION of the screen for selecting an item Select the Scanning position using the or numeric keys Press the start key The value is se
277. t location Optical Laser scanner unit Check or User call Clean the shield glass with a section clean dry cloth Platen Clean 400K 30 Clean with alcohol and then a 500K 40 50 dry cloth Slit glass Clean 400K 30 Clean with a dry cloth or alco 500K 40 50 hol Mirror 1 Clean User call Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Section Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Mirror 2 and mirror 3 User call Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image User call Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Reflector User call Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Exposure lamp Check or User call Replace if an image problem replace occurs Optical rail Grease User call Check noise and shifting and then apply scanner rail grease EM 50L Original size detection Check or User call Clean the sensor emitter and sensor clean sensor receiver with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a problem Maintenance Method part location Transfer Transfer roller unit Replace 400K 30 Replace Clean when user separation 500K 40 50 call occurs section Section Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Maintenance Method part location Developing Developing unit Replace 400K 30 Replace Check and replace sectio
278. ta damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory device problem Engine PWB Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory data problem Engine PWB Reading data from EEPROM is abnor mal Read and write data does not match five times continuously Problem with the backup memory data Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the backup memory data Defective engine PWB If the C0160 is displayed after initializing the backup memory replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation Copy counis problem A checksum error is detected in the main and engine backup memories for the copy counters Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Defective PWB Replace the main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Machine number mismatch error Machine number of main PWB and engine PWB does not match Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division DIMM installed incorrectly DIMM is not installed correctly DIMM installed incorrectly Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly DIMM problem The DIMM on the main PWB does not operate correctly Defective main PWB
279. tected Developing unit connector inserted incorrectly Reinsert the developing unit connector if necessary Defective develop ing unit connector Replace the developing unit Drum unit connector insertion prob lem Absence of the drum unit is detected Drum unit connec tor inserted incor rectly Reinsert the drum unit connector if neces sary Defective drum unit connector Replace the drum unit 1 4 32 Broken external thermistor wire The thermistor output value is 4 5 V or more Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC14 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective humidity sensor Replace the humidity sensor Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Short circuited external thermistor The thermistor input value is 0 5 V or less Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC14 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective humidity sensor Replace the humidity sensor Drum EEPROM error Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repai
280. ted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA1 Leading edge registration first page 32to32 O 0 09 mm ADJUST DATA2 Trailing edge registration first page 32to32 O 0 09 mm ADJUST DATA3 Leading edge registration second 45 1045 0 0 09 mm page ADJUST DATA4 Trailing edge registration second 45 to 45 0 09 mm page ADJUST DATA5 Leading edge registration rotate 20 to 20 0 17 mm copying Adjustment leading edge registration 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 14 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U071 U404 cas F80 1 3 28 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U071 Adjustment trailing edge registration 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy exampl
281. ted item is displayed Display Description LSU OUT TOP Leading edge registration adjustment LSU OUT LEFT Center line adjustment Adjustment leading edge registration adjustment 1 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step TOP Adjustment of reference value 0 to 500 1 0 mm MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray 250 to 250 1 0 mm CASSETTE Paper feed from cassette 250 to 250 1 0 mm DUPLEX Duplex mode second 250 to 250 1 0 mm Setting the difference value from reference value Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 decrease the value For output example 2 increase the value Leading edge registration Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 4 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U066 U071 P 1 3 24 P 1 3 28 1 3 18 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U034_ Adjustment center line adjustment 1 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step LEFT Adjustment of reference value 0 to 1000
282. th Width 330 210 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper 0 0 0 0 Checking clutch operation Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Drive motor 2 Eject motor 0 Polygon motor 5 Optical Turning the exposure lamp on Adjusting the shading position 0 Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction auxiliary scanning direction 0 0 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0 0 Adjusting the scanner center line 0 0 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0 0 Adjusting the DP magnification 0 0 01 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0 0 0 0 0 Adjusting the DP center line 0 0 01 Checking scanner operation Adjusting the DP input light luminosity 0 0 0 Setting the economy mode 6 1 Setting DP reading position modification operation 175 170 160 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Setting the exposure density gradient Text and photo text photo 0 0 0 Adjusting original size detection 105 105 105 60 60 60 150 240 Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 2 Section Content of maintenance item 2GN 2GP 2GR Initial setting High voltage Setting the main high voltage Setting the other high voltages Developing bias AC component frequency at image formation Developing shift bias potential at
283. th the edge of black belt Figure 1 3 28 Method SCANNER 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 302FZ56990 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 302FZ56990 on the platen 3 Select the item Display Description ALL Automatic adjustment using the platen for original size magnification leading edge timing center line input gamma chromatic aberration filter MTF filter and matrix INPUT Automatic adjustment using the platen for original size magnification leading edge timing center line GAMMA Automatic adjustment using the platen for input gamma C A Automatic adjustment using the platen for chromatic aberration filter MTF Automatic adjustment using the platen for MTF filter MATRIX Automatic adjustment using the platen for matrix 4 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items 5 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 69 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U411 1 3 70 Method DP FACE UP
284. the DP main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation Defective DP inverter PWB Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for correct operation Defective CIS Replace the CIS and check for correct oper ation CCD AGC problem After AGC correct input is not obtained at CCD Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the SHD PWB and the connector on the CCD PWB and the continuity across the connec tor terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PWB Defective PWB Replace the SHD PWB or CCD PWB and check for correct operation CIS AGC problem After AGC correct input is not obtained at CIS Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation CIS output prob lem Replace the CIS and check for correct oper ation Defective DP inverter PWB Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for correct operation Communication error between scan ner and SHD An error code is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC3 on the scanner PWB and the connector YC4 on the SHD PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defe
285. the paper entry sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper entry sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Built in finisher Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper conveying switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 23 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying switch Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed Check and remedy 1 4 18 Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 33 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying fin isher stapler jam 3000 sheet document finishe r document finisher Defective staple home posi tion sensor Run maintenance item U241 and turn the staple home position sensor on and off manually Replace the sensor if indication of the corresponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Jam code 82 Built in finisher The stapler is blocked with Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the sta a staple pling section of the stapler Remove the staple if any Defective stapler section With 5 V DC present at YC2 24 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 19 on the finisher control PWB remains low
286. tion of the laser scanner unit see rectly page 1 5 23 1 4 50 1 4 4 Electric problems 2GN 2GP 2GR Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on The power cord is not plugged in properly Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet No electricity at the power outlet Measure the input voltage Broken power cord Check for continuity If none replace the cord Defective main power switch Check for continuity across the contacts If none replace the main power switch Defective power source PWB With AC present check for 24 V DC at YC1 7 on the power source PWB 5 V DC at YC1 6 and 3 3 V DC at YC1 5 If none replace the power source PWB 2 The eject motor does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective drive transmis sion system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective eject motor Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates If not replace the eject motor Defective
287. touch panel connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective touch panel or main operation PWB If any keys do not work after running the maintenance item U201 to initialize the touch panel replace the touch panel or main oper ation PWB 12 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cas sette 1 2 or MP tray Poor contact in the con nector terminals of upper lower paper switch or MP paper switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective upper lower paper switch or MP paper switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off replace the switch Upper paper switch YC13 B12 on the engine PWB Lower paper switch YC13 B18 on the engine PWB MP paper switch YC6 A6 on the engine PWB 13 The size of paper on the cassette 1 2 or MP tray is not dis played correctly Poor contact in the con nector terminals of upper lower paper size length switch upper lower paper size width switch MP paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective upper lower paper size len
288. uator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 11 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in optional paper feeder vertical paper con veying section Jam code 19 Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective paper feeder feed switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN2 7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper feeder feed switch 12 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in MP tray vertical paper conveying section Jam code 20 Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on an
289. unction of the DP lift lower limit switch Replace the DP lift lower limit switch and check for correct operation Loose connection of the DP lift lower limit switch con nector Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation DP EEPROM error optional DP Read and write data does not match Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Communication problem between DP and SHD optional DP A communication error is detected Loose connection of the SHD PWB Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective SHD PWB Replace the SHD PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 42 Communication problem between DP and CIS optional DP Reading cannot be performed correctly Loose connection of CIS Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective CIS Replace CIS and check for correct opera tion Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures c
290. user ther mistor 1 If any problem is found repair it Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Zero cross signal error While fuser heater ON OFF control is performed the zero cross signal is not input within 3 s Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB or power source PWB and check for correct operation Fuser unit connector insertion prob lem Absence of the fuser unit is detected Fuser unit connec tor inserted incor rectly Reinsert the fuser unit connector if neces sary Defective fuser unit connector Replace the fuser unit Fuser unit fuse cut problem The fuse in the fuser unit did not blow within three seconds Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Fuser unit connec tor inserted incor rectly Reinsert the fuser unit connector if neces sary Toner container problem Toner level is not detected when toner empty is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC9 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective toner container sensor Replace the toner container sensor Developing unit connector insertion problem Absence of the developing unit is de
291. ustment until paper is properly in position Setting adjustment of front and back stapling home position 1 Select STAPLE HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of front and back stapling home position 10 to 10 0 0 32 mm When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine sample 1 increase the preset value When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine sample 2 decrease the preset value Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 20 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 55 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U246_ Setting adjustment of slanted stapling home position 1 Select T STAPLE HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of slanted stapling home position 10 to 10 0 0 99 To increase the angle for slanted stapling sample 1 decrease the preset value To decrease the angle for slanted stapling sample 2 increase the preset value rs i Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 21 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting centerfold unit 1 Select t
292. ver 1 2 While holding down the projection slide the transfer roller unit toward the front to remove it 3 Replace the transfer roller unit and install the unit Projection Figure 1 5 56 1 5 27 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 7 Fuser section 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fuser unit Procedure 1 Remove the clip holder 2 Open the front cover and left cover 1 Qc holder 3 Remove four screws and remove front left cover Front left cover Figure 1 5 57 4 Remove the screw and remove the fuser unit 5 Check or replace the fuser unit and install the unit 6 Perform maintenance mode U167 to clear the counter value see page 1 3 43 Fuser unit Figure 1 5 58 1 5 28 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 Pin 2 Remove the two screws and remove the Upper fuser cover upper fuser cover while holding the four claws 3 Remove the heat roller separation claws from the upper fuser cover 4 Replace the heat roller separation claws and install the claws to upper fuser cover Refit the upper fuser cover Refit the fuser unit on Heat roller separation claws Figure 1 5 60 1 5 29 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure be
293. wer lift motor Defective lower lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace lower lift motor Defective lower lift limit switch Check if YC13 B15 on the engine PWB goes low when lower lift limit switch is turned off If not replace lower lift limit switch Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of lower lift limit switch and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 25 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feeder lift motor 1 error optional paper feeder When optional cassette 3 is inserted paper feeder lift switch 1 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 1 Replace paper feeder lift motor 1 Defective paper feeder lift motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 1 Defective paper feeder lift switch 1 Check if YC1 5 on the paper f
294. x kit is installed Serial No 10 digits Mac address Cleared date and output date Page of relation to the A4 Letter Average coverage Total Copy Printer Fax Coverage on the final output page Presence or absence of the optional DP Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional paper feeder Cassette paper feeder LCF 3000 sheet paper feeder Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional document finisher Inner Finisher built in finisher 3000 Finisher 3000 sheet document finisher 1000 Finisher document finisher Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional job separator Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the Compact Flash Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional PDF upgrade kit Installed The formal version is installed Not Installed The PDF upgrade kit is not installed Trial Version xx xx xx A trial version is installed Presence or absence of the optional data backup kit Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional security kit Installed Not Installed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U000 Description Supplement Identification name for the security kit Security kit version Printed page counts Total Copy Printer Fax Scanned page counts Total Copy Other Counts by paper sizes Fax kit inform

KM3050-4050-5050 service manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents